Videotek | VTM-2000 | Specifications | Videotek VTM-2000 Specifications

VTM Series
Multi-Format HD/SD-SDI Monitor
Installation and Operation Handbook
TWO-YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY
Videotek, Inc. warrants that this product is free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two years from the date
of purchase, except for CRTs and LCDs, which are warranted for a period of one year. During this warranty period, Videotek will,
at its option, repair or replace defective products at no charge for the parts or labor. Batteries are not covered in the warranty.
For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Videotek in the original packing or
its equivalent. The purchaser shall insure the product and prepay shipping charges to Videotek, and Videotek shall insure the
product and pay shipping charges to return the product to the purchaser.
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects or damage resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by the
purchaser, connecting the product to incompatible equipment, misuses, operation outside any environmental specification for the
product, improper site preparation or maintenance, or attempts by personnel other than authorized Videotek representatives to
repair or service the product.
No other warranty is expressed or implied. Videotek specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for
a particular purpose. The remedies provided by the foregoing warranty are the purchaser's sole and exclusive remedies.
Videotek shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, whether based on contract, tort,
or otherwise.
Printed October 2006
Item #061778 Rev. D
Copyright © 2006 by Videotek, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Videotek, Inc.
This instrument, in whole or in part, may be protected by one or more US (US Patent 6,069,607) or foreign patents or
patent applications.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation
PS2 is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation
Dolby, AC-3, Dolby E, and the double D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Videotek and the Videotek logo are registered trademarks of Videotek, Inc.
CineSound is a registered trademark of Videotek, Inc.
IntelliMouse is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation
VIDEOTEK SOFTWARE LICENSE AND WARRANTY
The software which accompanies this license (the "Software") is the property of Videotek or its licensors and is
protected by copyright law. While Videotek continues to own the Software, you will have certain rights to use the
Software after your acceptance of this license. Except as may be modified by a license addendum which accompanies
this license, your rights and obligations with respect to the use of this Software are as follows:
•
•
You may not:
i.
Sublicense, rent, or lease any portion of the Software; or
ii.
Reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, modify, translate, make any attempt to discover the source code
of the Software, or create derivative works from the Software
Limited Warranty:
Videotek warrants that the media on which the Software is distributed will be free from defects for a period of sixty (60)
days from the date of delivery of the Software to you. Your sole remedy in the event of a breach of this warranty will be
that Videotek will replace any defective media returned to Videotek within the warranty period. Videotek does not
warrant that the Software will meet your requirements or that operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or that the
Software will be error-free.
THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU MAY HAVE
OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.
•
Disclaimer of Damages:
REGARDLESS OF WHETHER ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE, IN NO
EVENT WILL VIDEOTEK BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT OR SIMILAR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF VIDEOTEK HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
IN NO CASE SHALL VIDEOTEK LIABILITY EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE FOR THE SOFTWARE. This
disclaimer and limitations set forth above will apply regardless of whether you accept the Software.
•
U.S. Government Restricted Rights:
RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set
forth in subparagraph © (1) (ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227-7013
or subparagraphs © (1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights clause at 48 CFR 52.227-19,
as applicable, Videotek, Inc., 243 Shoemaker Road, Pottstown, PA 19464.
•
General:
This agreement will be governed by the laws of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania. This Agreement may only be
modified by a license addendum which accompanies this license or by a written document which has been signed by
both you and Videotek. Should you have any questions concerning this Agreement, or if you desire to contact Videotek
for any reason, please write:
Videotek, Inc.
243 Shoemaker Road
Pottstown, PA 19464-6433
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
OPERATOR'S SAFETY SUMMARY
CAUTION — these instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To reduce
the risk of electric shock, do not perform this installation or any servicing unless you
are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
To ensure safety:
•
The unit should not be exposed to dripping or splashing, and no objects filled with liquids, such as
vases, shall be placed on the unit.
•
When the unit is to be permanently cabled, connect the protective ground conductor before making
any other connections.
•
Operate built-in units only when they are properly fitted into the system.
•
For permanently cabled units without built-in fuses, automatic switches, or similar protective facilities,
the AC supply line must be fitted with fuses rated to the units.
•
Before switching on the unit, ensure that the operating voltage set at the unit matches the line
voltage, if appropriate. If a different operating voltage is to be set, use a fuse with the appropriate
rating. Refer to the Installation Instructions.
•
Units of Protection Class I with an AC supply cable and plug that can be disconnected must be
operated only from a power socket with protective ground contact:
•
−
Do not use an extension cable—it can render the protective ground connection ineffective.
−
Do not intentionally interrupt the protective ground conductor.
−
Do not break the protective ground conductor inside or outside the unit or loosen the protective
ground connection; such actions can cause the unit to become electrically hazardous.
Before opening the unit, isolate it from the AC supply. Then ensure that:
−
Adjustments, part replacements, maintenance, and repairs are carried out by qualified personnel
only.
−
Safety regulations and rules are observed to prevent accidents.
−
Only original parts are used to replace parts relevant to safety (for example, the power on/off
switches, power transformers, and fuses).
•
Replaceable fuses can be hazardous when live. Before replacing a fuse, disconnect the AC power
source.
•
Use caution when cleaning the equipment; isopropyl alcohol or similar solvents can damage or
remove the labels.
•
Observe any additional safety instructions specified in this manual.
These symbols may appear on Videotek equipment:
Explanation of Symbols
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
European Restriction on Hazardous Substance (RoHS), and Waste from
Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance
About This Document
This document provides information concerning Leitch Technology International, Inc. compliance with EU
Directive 2002/95/EC and EU Directive 2002/96/EC.
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive
Directive 2002/95/EC—commonly known as the European Union (EU) Restriction on Hazardous
Substances (RoHS)—sets limits on the use of certain substances found in electrical and electronic
equipment. The intent of this legislation is to reduce the amount of hazardous chemicals that may leach
out of landfill sites or otherwise contaminate the environment during end-of-life recycling. The Directive
takes effect on July 1, 2006, and it refers to the following hazardous substances:
•
Lead (Pb)
•
Mercury (Hg)
•
Cadmium (Cd)
•
Hexavalent Chromium (Cr-V1)
•
Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB)
•
Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE)
In accordance with this EU Directive, all Leitch Technology products sold in the European Union will be
fully RoHS-compliant and “lead-free.” (See the Leitch Web site, www.leitch.com, for more information on
dates and deadlines for compliance.) Spare parts supplied for the repair and upgrade of equipment sold
before July 1, 2006 are exempt from the legislation. Leitch equipment that complies with the EU directive
will be marked with a RoHS-compliant symbol, as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1. RoHS Compliance Symbol
WASTE FROM ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT (WEEE)
DIRECTIVE
The European Union (EU) Directive 2002/96/EC on Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment
(WEEE) deals with the collection, treatment, recovery, and recycling of electrical and electronic waste
products. The objective of the WEEE Directive is to assign the responsibility for the disposal of associated
hazardous waste to either the producers or users of these products. Effective August 13, 2005, producers
or users will be required to recycle electrical and electronic equipment at end of its useful life, and must
not dispose of the equipment in landfills or by using other unapproved methods. (Some EU member
states may have different deadlines.)
In accordance with this EU Directive, Leitch Technology International, Inc. and other companies selling
electric or electronic devices in the EU will affix labels indicating that such products must be properly
recycled.
(See the Leitch Web site, www.leitch.com, for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance.)
Contact your local Leitch sales representative for information on returning these products for recycling.
Leitch equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a WEEE-compliant symbol, as
shown in Figure 2.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Figure 2. WEEE Compliance Symbol
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Blank Page
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Contents
Section 1 ♦ Introduction
VTM Series Configuration..................................................................................................... 1-2
Video Standards Supported.................................................................................................. 1-5
Service and Support.............................................................................................................. 1-7
Section 2 ♦ Installation
Inspecting the Shipment ....................................................................................................... 2-1
Rack Mounting the VTM Series ............................................................................................ 2-2
Connecting the VTM Series ............................................................................................. 2-3
Ethernet Setup ................................................................................................................. 2-4
Configuring the VTM Series for Remote Control .................................................................. 2-6
Configuring the VTM/TVM Series with the RCU 1000 Remote Control .......................... 2-7
Using the Bypass Feature................................................................................................ 2-8
Section 3 ♦ General Operation
Terms .................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Introduction to Operating the VTM Series ............................................................................ 3-1
Types of Controls .................................................................................................................. 3-2
Front Panel Illumination ........................................................................................................ 3-2
Sleep Mode ........................................................................................................................... 3-4
Selecting a Pane ................................................................................................................... 3-4
Full-Screen Display Selection .......................................................................................... 3-4
Selecting an Input for a Pane................................................................................................ 3-5
Format Mismatch Message.............................................................................................. 3-5
Linking Panes................................................................................................................... 3-5
Selecting the Function for the Pane...................................................................................... 3-5
Function Not Allowed Message ............................................................................................ 3-5
Option Not Installed Message............................................................................................... 3-5
Navigating the Pane Setup menu ......................................................................................... 3-6
External Reference .......................................................................................................... 3-7
External Reference ...................................................................................................... 3-7
EXT Setup ................................................................................................................... 3-8
Pane Overview...................................................................................................................... 3-8
Main Title Bar ................................................................................................................... 3-8
Icons ............................................................................................................................ 3-9
Status Bar ........................................................................................................................ 3-9
The Waveform Display.......................................................................................................... 3-9
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
i
Contents
Waveform Front Panel Selections ................................................................................. 3-13
Moving the Waveform using the Setup Knobs .......................................................... 3-13
Sweep Buttons .......................................................................................................... 3-13
Gain Buttons .............................................................................................................. 3-15
Placing the Waveform Display in Line Select Mode.................................................. 3-16
Waveform Cursor Selections..................................................................................... 3-17
Waveform Pane Menu Selections ................................................................................. 3-18
Filter Selection ........................................................................................................... 3-20
Parade and Overlay Selections ................................................................................. 3-20
HD or SD Format....................................................................................................... 3-20
Blanking (SD-SDI and HD only) ................................................................................ 3-20
Component Sequence (SD-SDI and HD only) .......................................................... 3-21
Center Waveform ...................................................................................................... 3-21
Waveform Setup ........................................................................................................ 3-21
Utilizing the EYE Display (VTM-OPT EYE1 or EYE2 only) ................................................ 3-21
Eye Pattern Observation................................................................................................ 3-23
Eye Pattern Rise Time ................................................................................................... 3-23
Jitter Meter and Eye Pattern Correlation ....................................................................... 3-23
Horizontal Magnification and Zoom in Eye Pattern Mode ......................................... 3-23
Eye Pattern Cursor Selections .................................................................................. 3-24
Eye Pattern Pane Menu Selections ............................................................................... 3-25
Jitter High Pass Filter (HPF) Selection .......................................................................... 3-26
Trigger Mode.................................................................................................................. 3-26
Eye Pattern Setup ..................................................................................................... 3-26
Utilizing the Vector Display ................................................................................................. 3-27
Controlling the Vector .................................................................................................... 3-33
Gain Buttons .............................................................................................................. 3-33
Placing the Vector Display in Line Select Mode....................................................... 3-34
Vector Cursor Selections........................................................................................... 3-34
Vector Pane Menu Selections ....................................................................................... 3-35
Standard .................................................................................................................... 3-36
Scaled to Composite (SD and HD only) .................................................................... 3-36
Vector Position (Centering the Vector)...................................................................... 3-36
Vector Setup .............................................................................................................. 3-37
Gamut Display..................................................................................................................... 3-37
Composite Gamut .......................................................................................................... 3-38
RGB Gamut Display....................................................................................................... 3-40
Placing the Gamut Display in Line Select Mode........................................................... 3-41
Gamut Zoom .................................................................................................................. 3-42
ii
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Contents
Gamut Pane Menu Selections ....................................................................................... 3-42
Color Space ............................................................................................................... 3-42
Gamut Setup.............................................................................................................. 3-42
Picture Display .................................................................................................................... 3-42
Picture Pane Menu Selections....................................................................................... 3-44
Native Mode............................................................................................................... 3-45
Delay.......................................................................................................................... 3-45
Gamut Highlighting .................................................................................................... 3-45
Picture Setup ............................................................................................................. 3-45
Closed Caption .......................................................................................................... 3-45
Timing Display..................................................................................................................... 3-46
Things to Remember When Using the Timing Display .................................................. 3-48
Timing Pane Menu Selections ....................................................................................... 3-48
Reference Selection .................................................................................................. 3-48
Timing Mode .............................................................................................................. 3-49
Alarm Display ...................................................................................................................... 3-49
Alarm Log Display.......................................................................................................... 3-49
Alarm Status Display...................................................................................................... 3-51
Alarm Log and Status Pane Menu Selections ............................................................... 3-53
Display ....................................................................................................................... 3-53
Alarm Log Display...................................................................................................... 3-54
Mute Alarms............................................................................................................... 3-54
Video Alarm Analog ................................................................................................... 3-54
Video Alarm Digital .................................................................................................... 3-54
Audio Alarms ............................................................................................................. 3-54
Audio Display ...................................................................................................................... 3-54
Audio Scales .................................................................................................................. 3-55
Vertical Audio Displays .............................................................................................. 3-55
CineSound Display .................................................................................................... 3-61
Expanding the Audio Display ......................................................................................... 3-63
Audio Menu Selections .................................................................................................. 3-64
Audio Input Check ..................................................................................................... 3-64
Lissajous.................................................................................................................... 3-64
Audio Setup ............................................................................................................... 3-64
Option Display..................................................................................................................... 3-64
Display ........................................................................................................................... 3-65
Option Setup.............................................................................................................. 3-65
Dolby Metadata Display (Option Dependent) ................................................................ 3-65
Video Metadata .............................................................................................................. 3-67
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
iii
Contents
XDS................................................................................................................................ 3-69
Teletext .......................................................................................................................... 3-70
CRC ............................................................................................................................... 3-71
ASI (Option VTM-OPT ASI only) ................................................................................... 3-73
Bandwidth and Trending Screen ............................................................................... 3-75
ASI Menu Selections ................................................................................................. 3-76
Embedded Audio Data................................................................................................... 3-77
Multi-Screen Display Selection ........................................................................................... 3-78
VTM Classic................................................................................................................... 3-78
Data Analyzer Display (TVM-OPT AAP Option) ............................................................ 3-81
Pixel Cursor ............................................................................................................... 3-82
Data Display Pop-up Menu........................................................................................ 3-83
Trigger on Alarm........................................................................................................ 3-83
Data Display Format.................................................................................................. 3-84
Pixel Group Display ................................................................................................... 3-84
Navigation Mode........................................................................................................ 3-84
Data Search............................................................................................................... 3-85
Custom Data Search ................................................................................................. 3-85
Timing Custom Display .................................................................................................. 3-85
WFM/VEC Only Display (Dual-Screen Display) ............................................................ 3-86
Presets ................................................................................................................................ 3-87
Storing Presets .............................................................................................................. 3-87
Recalling Presets ........................................................................................................... 3-87
Preset *8 (Factory Preset) ............................................................................................. 3-87
Preset Setup Menu ............................................................................................................. 3-87
Name Preset .................................................................................................................. 3-88
Capturing a Display............................................................................................................. 3-88
Clear Captured Frame ................................................................................................... 3-89
Capturing Display Information............................................................................................. 3-89
Clear Captured Data ...................................................................................................... 3-89
Freeze and Freeze + Live Mode.................................................................................... 3-89
Section 4 ♦ Global Setup Menu Functions
Navigating the Setup Menu................................................................................................... 4-1
Setup Menu and Alarm Tables ............................................................................................. 4-2
Video Format Menu ....................................................................................................... 4-31
Dual Link.................................................................................................................... 4-31
Video A, B, C, or D Configure.................................................................................... 4-31
Source ID................................................................................................................... 4-31
iv
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Contents
Waveform Setup Menu .................................................................................................. 4-31
Digital Waveform Graticule........................................................................................ 4-31
NTSC Pedestal (or 7.5 IRE Setup)............................................................................ 4-31
PAL Waveform Scale................................................................................................. 4-32
DC Restore (Analog Option Required) ...................................................................... 4-32
Waveform Intensity .................................................................................................... 4-32
Waveform Contrast.................................................................................................... 4-32
Persistence ................................................................................................................ 4-32
Attack......................................................................................................................... 4-32
Error Highlighting ....................................................................................................... 4-32
Eye Pattern Setup Menu................................................................................................ 4-33
Jitter Display Type ..................................................................................................... 4-33
Eye Intensity .............................................................................................................. 4-33
Eye Contrast .............................................................................................................. 4-33
Persistence ................................................................................................................ 4-33
Attack......................................................................................................................... 4-33
Vector Setup Menu ........................................................................................................ 4-33
PAL Overlay (Analog Option Required)..................................................................... 4-34
SD I/Q Lines .............................................................................................................. 4-34
Vector Intensity .......................................................................................................... 4-34
Vector Contrast.......................................................................................................... 4-34
Persistence ................................................................................................................ 4-34
Attack......................................................................................................................... 4-34
Gamut Setup Menu........................................................................................................ 4-34
Gamut Intensity.......................................................................................................... 4-34
Gamut Contrast ......................................................................................................... 4-34
Persistence ................................................................................................................ 4-35
Color Plot ................................................................................................................... 4-35
Data Error Persistence .............................................................................................. 4-35
Error Highlighting ....................................................................................................... 4-35
Picture Setup Menu ....................................................................................................... 4-35
Thumbnail .................................................................................................................. 4-35
Markers...................................................................................................................... 4-36
Closed Caption Display ............................................................................................. 4-36
XDS ........................................................................................................................... 4-36
(Closed Caption) Size................................................................................................ 4-37
Anamorphic................................................................................................................ 4-37
Time Code ................................................................................................................. 4-37
Brightness.................................................................................................................. 4-38
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
v
Contents
Contrast ..................................................................................................................... 4-38
(Picture) Color............................................................................................................ 4-38
Blue Gun.................................................................................................................... 4-38
Red Gun .................................................................................................................... 4-38
Green Gun ................................................................................................................. 4-38
VBI MASK.................................................................................................................. 4-38
Display Setup................................................................................................................. 4-38
Display Colors............................................................................................................ 4-38
Graticule Intensity...................................................................................................... 4-39
Cursor Intensity ......................................................................................................... 4-39
XGA Freeze ............................................................................................................... 4-39
Monitor....................................................................................................................... 4-40
Communications Setup.................................................................................................. 4-40
RCU Port ................................................................................................................... 4-40
IP Configuration......................................................................................................... 4-41
GPI Input Function and GPI Alarm Names ............................................................... 4-42
GPI Output Function.................................................................................................. 4-43
GPI Alarm Reporting Setup ....................................................................................... 4-43
Router Port ................................................................................................................ 4-43
Unit ID........................................................................................................................ 4-44
System Setup Menu....................................................................................................... 4-44
Panel and Preset Lockout ......................................................................................... 4-44
Set Time .................................................................................................................... 4-47
Time Code Input ........................................................................................................ 4-47
Aural Alert .................................................................................................................. 4-47
Exit Bypass on Alarm ................................................................................................ 4-48
Control Illumination.................................................................................................... 4-48
Diagnostics (System Fault Log)................................................................................. 4-48
File Navigator................................................................................................................. 4-48
Flash from USB.............................................................................................................. 4-49
About.............................................................................................................................. 4-49
Section 5 ♦ Alarm Descriptions
Setting Alarms....................................................................................................................... 5-1
Alarm Message Contents and Limitations ....................................................................... 5-2
Video Alarms Digital Descriptions......................................................................................... 5-2
Format Change ................................................................................................................ 5-2
Digital Gamut ................................................................................................................... 5-3
RGB Upper/Lower ....................................................................................................... 5-3
vi
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Contents
Lum Upper/Lower ........................................................................................................ 5-3
Peak Upper/Lower ....................................................................................................... 5-3
EDH – SD......................................................................................................................... 5-3
CRC HD ........................................................................................................................... 5-3
CRC Alarms................................................................................................................. 5-3
Loss of Carrier.................................................................................................................. 5-5
Loss of Video ................................................................................................................... 5-5
Loss of Reference ............................................................................................................ 5-5
Letterbox – SD ................................................................................................................. 5-5
Pillarbox - HD ................................................................................................................... 5-5
Picture Shift...................................................................................................................... 5-6
Captioning ........................................................................................................................ 5-6
CC Not Detected – 608 ............................................................................................... 5-6
CC Not Updating- 608 ................................................................................................. 5-6
CC Not Detected – 708 ............................................................................................... 5-6
CC Not Updating – 708 ............................................................................................... 5-6
Teletext Not Detected – SD......................................................................................... 5-6
Subtitle Not Detected................................................................................................... 5-6
Subtitle Not Updating................................................................................................... 5-7
WSS (Widescreen Signaling) Not Detected ................................................................ 5-7
XDS Not Detected ....................................................................................................... 5-7
XDS Not Updating ....................................................................................................... 5-7
Eye Jitter .......................................................................................................................... 5-7
Timing Alarm .................................................................................................................... 5-7
Video Alarms Analog Descriptions........................................................................................ 5-7
Loss of Signal................................................................................................................... 5-7
Loss of Reference ............................................................................................................ 5-7
Loss of Video ................................................................................................................... 5-7
Analog Gamut .................................................................................................................. 5-8
Peak Upper.................................................................................................................. 5-8
Peak Lower.................................................................................................................. 5-8
Luma Upper ................................................................................................................. 5-8
Luma Lower ................................................................................................................. 5-8
Sync and Burst................................................................................................................. 5-8
H (Horizontal) Sync Upper........................................................................................... 5-8
H (Horizontal) Sync Lower........................................................................................... 5-8
Burst Upper.................................................................................................................. 5-8
Burst Lower.................................................................................................................. 5-8
Burst to Chroma Phase.................................................................................................... 5-8
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
vii
Contents
Horizontal Blanking (H Blanking) ..................................................................................... 5-9
Vertical Blanking .............................................................................................................. 5-9
SC/H Phase ..................................................................................................................... 5-9
VITS ................................................................................................................................. 5-9
Captioning........................................................................................................................ 5-9
Closed Caption Not Detected - Analog ....................................................................... 5-9
Closed Caption Not Updating - Analog ....................................................................... 5-9
Teletext Not Detected – Analog ................................................................................ 5-10
Teletext Not Updating – Analog ................................................................................ 5-10
XDS Not Detected – Analog ...................................................................................... 5-10
XDS Not Updating – Analog ...................................................................................... 5-10
Time Code Alarm Descriptions ........................................................................................... 5-10
LTC Time Code Alarms ................................................................................................. 5-10
LTC Loss of Time Code............................................................................................. 5-10
LTC Time Code Level................................................................................................ 5-10
LTC Time Code Framing ........................................................................................... 5-10
LTC Time Code Continuity ........................................................................................ 5-10
LTC/VITC Compare (TC Sync).................................................................................. 5-11
DVITC Time Code Alarm Error Types ........................................................................... 5-11
DVITC Loss of Time Code......................................................................................... 5-11
DVITC Line ................................................................................................................ 5-11
DVITC Continuity....................................................................................................... 5-11
DVITC CRC ............................................................................................................... 5-11
TS Alarms Descriptions (VTM-OPT ASI)............................................................................ 5-11
Alarm Reporting Setup................................................................................................... 5-11
Loss of Signal ................................................................................................................ 5-11
CRC Change.................................................................................................................. 5-11
ETR 290 1st Priority........................................................................................................ 5-12
TS Sync Loss............................................................................................................. 5-12
Sync Byte Error ......................................................................................................... 5-12
PAT Error................................................................................................................... 5-12
Continuity Count Error ............................................................................................... 5-12
PMT Error .................................................................................................................. 5-12
PID Error.................................................................................................................... 5-13
ETR 290 2nd Priority ....................................................................................................... 5-13
Transport Error .......................................................................................................... 5-13
CRC Error .................................................................................................................. 5-13
PCR Error .................................................................................................................. 5-13
PCR Accuracy ........................................................................................................... 5-13
viii
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Contents
PTS Error................................................................................................................... 5-13
CAT Error................................................................................................................... 5-14
ETR 290 3rd Priority........................................................................................................ 5-14
NIT Actual Error (DVB only) ...................................................................................... 5-14
NIT Other Error (DVB only) ....................................................................................... 5-14
SDT Actual Error (DVB only) ..................................................................................... 5-14
SDT Other Error (DVB only) ...................................................................................... 5-14
EIT Actual Error (DVB only)....................................................................................... 5-14
EIT Other Error (DVB only)........................................................................................ 5-15
EIT PF Error (DVB only) ............................................................................................ 5-15
Unreferenced PID Error............................................................................................. 5-15
Repetition Error.......................................................................................................... 5-15
Base PID Error........................................................................................................... 5-16
Buffer Errors .............................................................................................................. 5-16
Empty Buffer Error ..................................................................................................... 5-16
Data Delay Error ........................................................................................................ 5-16
Section 6 ♦ External Control
Using the Keyboard Commands ........................................................................................... 6-1
Mouse Operation................................................................................................................... 6-3
SpyderWeb II ........................................................................................................................ 6-3
Browser Interface .................................................................................................................. 6-4
Tab/Tab Details................................................................................................................ 6-5
Web RCU ......................................................................................................................... 6-6
SNMP Communications ........................................................................................................ 6-7
Section 7 ♦ Troubleshooting
Cold Starting the VTM Series ............................................................................................... 7-1
Cold Start ......................................................................................................................... 7-1
Warm Start ....................................................................................................................... 7-2
Cold Start after VFlash..................................................................................................... 7-2
Problems, Causes, and Solutions......................................................................................... 7-2
Appendix A ♦ Specifications
Video .....................................................................................................................................A-1
DVI-I Output ..........................................................................................................................A-2
Audio Options........................................................................................................................A-2
Control...................................................................................................................................A-3
Display ..................................................................................................................................A-4
Time Code.............................................................................................................................A-5
Eye Pattern ...........................................................................................................................A-5
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
ix
Contents
Jitter Display.......................................................................................................................... A-6
SDI Freeze ............................................................................................................................ A-6
Data Analyzer........................................................................................................................ A-7
CRC Error Display ................................................................................................................ A-7
Closed Captioning Displays .................................................................................................. A-8
Gamut Display....................................................................................................................... A-8
Magnification ......................................................................................................................... A-8
Ethernet................................................................................................................................. A-9
External Routing Control.......................................................................................................A-9
Remote Control ..................................................................................................................... A-9
Power Requirements ............................................................................................................ A-9
Mechanical ............................................................................................................................ A-9
Environmental .....................................................................................................................A-10
Standard Accessories .........................................................................................................A-10
Console ...............................................................................................................................A-10
Display Drivers ....................................................................................................................A-10
VTM Audio Options (Supports One) ...................................................................................A-10
Video Input Options ............................................................................................................A-11
Other Options......................................................................................................................A-11
Appendix B ♦ Pinouts
Appendix C ♦ Glossary
Index
Figures
Figure 1-1. VTM Series Front and Back Panels....................................................................... 1-6
Figure 2-1. Mounting the VTM Series in a Rack ...................................................................... 2-2
Figure 2-2. VTM Series Back Panel Connectors...................................................................... 2-3
Figure 2-3. VTM Series Dedicated PC Connection.................................................................. 2-5
Figure 2-4. VTM Series Network PC Connection..................................................................... 2-5
Figure 2-5. Multiple VTM Series Network PC Connection ....................................................... 2-6
Figure 2-6. Connecting the RCU 1000 Remote Control Panel to Multiple VTM/TVM Series
Units ................................................................................................................................. 2-7
Figure 2-7. Using the Bypass Feature...................................................................................... 2-8
Figure 3-1. VTM Series Front Panel* ....................................................................................... 3-1
Figure 3-2. Sample Multi-Display ............................................................................................. 3-2
Figure 3-3. Selecting a Pane .................................................................................................... 3-4
Figure 3-4. Sample Quad Diagram........................................................................................... 3-8
Figure 3-5. Full-Screen Display Diagram ................................................................................. 3-8
Figure 3-6. Waveform Display Diagram ................................................................................. 3-10
x
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Contents
Figure 3-7. RGB and YCBCR Graticule ................................................................................... 3-12
Figure 3-8. RGB and YCBCR Zoom 0 mV Graticule ............................................................... 3-12
Figure 3-9. RGB and YCBCR Zoom 700 mV Graticule ........................................................... 3-12
Figure 3-10. Moving the Waveform ........................................................................................ 3-13
Figure 3-11. Establishing the Sweep Scale............................................................................ 3-14
Figure 3-12. Establishing the Gain ......................................................................................... 3-15
Figure 3-13. Establishing Line Select ..................................................................................... 3-16
Figure 3-14. Establishing Cursor Select ................................................................................. 3-17
Figure 3-15. Eye Pattern Display Diagram ............................................................................. 3-21
Figure 3-16. Eye Pattern Graticule ......................................................................................... 3-22
Figure 3-17. Eye Pattern Graticule at Zoom 0V ..................................................................... 3-22
Figure 3-18. Eye Pattern Graticule at Zoom 800 mV ............................................................. 3-23
Figure 3-19. Establishing Cursor Select for Eye Pattern........................................................ 3-24
Figure 3-20. Vector Display Diagram ..................................................................................... 3-27
Figure 3-21. Vector NTSC Graticule....................................................................................... 3-28
Figure 3-22. Vector NTSC Zoom Upper Left......................................................................... 3-29
Figure 3-23. Vector NTSC Zoom Upper Right ....................................................................... 3-29
Figure 3-24. Vector NTSC Zoom Lower Right ....................................................................... 3-30
Figure 3-25. Vector NTSC Zoom Lower Left .......................................................................... 3-30
Figure 3-26. Vector PAL Zoom Center ................................................................................... 3-31
Figure 3-27. Vector SD with I/Q.............................................................................................. 3-31
Figure 3-28. Vector HD 75% + 100% Graticule...................................................................... 3-32
Figure 3-29. Establishing the Vector Gain.............................................................................. 3-33
Figure 3-30. Establishing Line Select ..................................................................................... 3-34
Figure 3-31. Establishing Cursor Select ................................................................................. 3-35
Figure 3-32. Gamut Display Diagram ..................................................................................... 3-37
Figure 3-33. Composite Gamut Vector Display Graticule Markings....................................... 3-39
Figure 3-34. Component Gamut Vector Display Graticule Markings ..................................... 3-40
Figure 3-35. Establishing Line Select ..................................................................................... 3-41
Figure 3-36. Picture Display Diagram..................................................................................... 3-43
Figure 3-37. Aspect Ratio Source Diagram............................................................................ 3-44
Figure 3-38. Timing Display Diagram ..................................................................................... 3-46
Figure 3-39. Alarm Log Diagram ............................................................................................ 3-50
Figure 3-40. Alarm Status Display Diagram ........................................................................... 3-52
Figure 3-41. Two Bar Graph Display with Lissajous Diagram................................................ 3-56
Figure 3-42. Four Bar Graph with Lissajous Display Diagram ............................................... 3-57
Figure 3-43. Six Bar Graph Diagram ...................................................................................... 3-59
Figure 3-44. Eight Bar Graph Display Diagram...................................................................... 3-60
Figure 3-45. CineSound 5.1 Display Diagram........................................................................ 3-61
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
xi
Contents
Figure 3-46. CineSound 6.1 Channels Display ...................................................................... 3-62
Figure 3-47. CineSound 7.1 Channels Display ...................................................................... 3-63
Figure 3-48. Dolby Metadata Display Diagram ...................................................................... 3-66
Figure 3-49. Video Metadata Display Diagram ...................................................................... 3-68
Figure 3-50. XDS pane.......................................................................................................... 3-70
Figure 3-51. CRC Display Diagram ........................................................................................ 3-71
Figure 3-52. ASI Display Diagram (ATSC Standard Selected) .............................................. 3-74
Figure 3-53. ASI Bandwidth Display....................................................................................... 3-76
Figure 3-54. VTM Classic Display Diagram ........................................................................... 3-79
Figure 3-55. Sample Alarm Message ..................................................................................... 3-80
Figure 3-56. Data Mode Display............................................................................................. 3-82
Figure 3-57. Custom Timing Display ...................................................................................... 3-86
Figure 3-58. WFM/VEC Only Display ..................................................................................... 3-86
Figure 4-1. Source ID Rename Screen .................................................................................. 4-31
Figure 4-2. Sample Thumbnail Screen................................................................................... 4-36
Figure 4-3. Display Color Selection ........................................................................................ 4-39
Figure 4-4. GPI Rename Screen ............................................................................................ 4-42
Figure 4-5. Panel and Preset Lock/Unlock Screen ................................................................ 4-44
Figure 4-6. Enter New Time Screen ....................................................................................... 4-47
Figure 4-7. System Fault Log ................................................................................................. 4-48
Figure 4-8. File Navigator Screen........................................................................................... 4-49
Figure 4-9. About Screen ....................................................................................................... 4-50
Figure 5-1. Sample Alarm Message (VTM Classic Mode Display) .......................................... 5-2
Figure 6-1. Sample Web Remote Display ................................................................................ 6-4
Figure B-1. ANALOG AUDIO IN/OUT 37-pin, Male, D-sub Connector For Audio Options...... B-1
Figure B-2. DVI-I In/Out Connector .......................................................................................... B-2
Figure B-3. LTC/GPI 26-pin, Female, D-sub Connector ......................................................... B-3
Figure B-4. LTC/GPI Breakout Board ....................................................................................... B-3
Figure B-5. Remote RJ-11 Control Connector ......................................................................... B-5
Figure B-6. Router RJ-11 Control Connector ........................................................................... B-5
Figure B-7. Ethernet RJ-45 Connector..................................................................................... B-6
Figure B-8. USB Connector......................................................................................................B-6
Tables
Table 2-1. Parts Required to Rack Mount the VTM Series using the DRC-2 .......................... 2-2
Table 2-2. Description of Back Panel Connectors.................................................................... 2-3
Table 3-1. Description of Front Panel Controls Illumination..................................................... 3-3
xii
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Contents
Table 3-2. EXT menu................................................................................................................ 3-7
Table 3-3. Description of Icons................................................................................................. 3-9
Table 3-4. Video Formats and Units of Measure.................................................................... 3-10
Table 3-5. Video Formats and Critical Amplitude Limits ........................................................ 3-10
Table 3-6. Description of Waveform Display Diagram ........................................................... 3-11
Table 3-7. Waveform (Analog) Menu Structure...................................................................... 3-18
Table 3-8. Waveform (SD-SDI) Menu Structure..................................................................... 3-18
Table 3-9. Waveform (HD-SDI) Menu Structure .................................................................... 3-19
Table 3-10. Input and Display Format Relationship ............................................................... 3-20
Table 3-11. Description of Eye Pattern Display Diagram ....................................................... 3-22
Table 3-12. Horizontal Magnification Conditions.................................................................... 3-24
Table 3-13. Eye SD-SDI Pane Menu Structure...................................................................... 3-25
Table 3-14. Eye HD-SDI Pane Menu Structure...................................................................... 3-26
Table 3-15. Description of Vector Display Diagram ............................................................... 3-27
Table 3-16. Vector Analog Pane Menu Structure................................................................... 3-36
Table 3-17. Vector SD-SDI Pane Menu Structure.................................................................. 3-36
Table 3-18. Vector HD-SDI Pane Menu Structure ................................................................. 3-36
Table 3-19. Description of Gamut Display Diagram ............................................................... 3-38
Table 3-20. Description of Composite Gamut Indicators........................................................ 3-39
Table 3-21. Description of RGB Gamut Indicators ................................................................. 3-41
Table 3-22. Gamut Menu Structure ........................................................................................ 3-42
Table 3-23. Description of Picture Display Diagram............................................................... 3-43
Table 3-24. Picture Analog Menu ........................................................................................... 3-44
Table 3-25. Picture SD Menu ................................................................................................. 3-44
Table 3-26. Picture HD Menu ................................................................................................. 3-45
Table 3-27. Description of Timing Display Diagram ............................................................... 3-47
Table 3-28. Timing Pane Menu .............................................................................................. 3-48
Table 3-29. Description of Alarm Log Display Diagram ......................................................... 3-50
Table 3-30. Description of Alarm Status Display Diagram ..................................................... 3-52
Table 3-31. Alarm Status Pane Menu .................................................................................... 3-53
Table 3-32. Description of Two Bar Graph Display with Lissajous Diagram.......................... 3-57
Table 3-33. Description of Four Bar Graph with Lissajous Display Diagram ......................... 3-58
Table 3-34. Description of Six Bar Graph Diagram ................................................................ 3-59
Table 3-35. Description of Eight Bar Graph Display Diagram ................................................ 3-60
Table 3-36. CineSound® Audio Input Mapping....................................................................... 3-61
Table 3-37. Description of CineSound Display Diagram ........................................................ 3-62
Table 3-38. Audio Pane Menu................................................................................................ 3-64
Table 3-39. Option Pane Menu .............................................................................................. 3-65
Table 3-40. Description of Dolby Metadata Display Diagram................................................. 3-67
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
xiii
Contents
Table 3-41. Description of the Video Metadata Display Diagram .......................................... 3-68
Table 3-42. Sample Video Metadata Pane List...................................................................... 3-69
Table 3-43. Sample Video Index Pane................................................................................... 3-69
Table 3-44. Description of the CRC Display Diagram ............................................................ 3-71
Table 3-45. ASI Pane Menu ................................................................................................... 3-76
Table 3-46. Description of Simultaneous VTM Classic Display ............................................. 3-79
Table 3-47. Description of Sample Alarm Message ............................................................... 3-81
Table 3-48. Description of Data Mode Display....................................................................... 3-82
Table 3-49. Data Analyzer Setup Menu ................................................................................. 3-83
Table 3-50. Preset Setup Menu.............................................................................................. 3-88
Table 4-1. Setup Menu Tables ................................................................................................. 4-2
Table 4-2. Video Format Menu................................................................................................. 4-3
Table 4-3. Waveform Setup Menu............................................................................................ 4-6
Table 4-4. Eye Pattern Setup Menu ......................................................................................... 4-7
Table 4-5. Vector Setup Menu.................................................................................................. 4-7
Table 4-6. Gamut Setup Menu ................................................................................................. 4-7
Table 4-7. Picture Setup Menu................................................................................................. 4-8
Table 4-8. Video Alarms, Digital Menu................................................................................... 4-10
Table 4-9. Video Alarms, Analog Menu.................................................................................. 4-15
Table 4-10. Time Code Alarms Menu..................................................................................... 4-21
Table 4-11. TS Alarms Menu (VTM-OPT ASI) ....................................................................... 4-22
Table 4-12. Display Setup Menu ............................................................................................ 4-26
Table 4-13. Display Colors Menu ........................................................................................... 4-27
Table 4-14. Communications Setup Menu ............................................................................. 4-27
Table 4-15. System Setup Menu ............................................................................................ 4-30
Table 4-16. About Menu ......................................................................................................... 4-30
Table 4-17. XDS Line Selections............................................................................................ 4-37
Table 5-1. Description of Sample Alarm Message ................................................................... 5-2
Table 5-2. CRC Alarm Error Types .......................................................................................... 5-4
Table 6-1. Keyboard Commands.............................................................................................. 6-1
Table 6-2. Mouse Functions ..................................................................................................... 6-3
Table 6-3. Tab/Tab Details Description.................................................................................... 6-5
Table 6-4. Web Remote Display Description ........................................................................... 6-6
Table 7-1. VTM Series: Problems, Causes, and Solutions ...................................................... 7-2
Table B-1. Pinouts for ANALOG AUDIO IN/OUT Connector and Audio Breakout Board ........ B-1
Table B-2. Pinouts for DVI-I In/Out Connector ......................................................................... B-2
Table B-3. Pinouts for LTC/GPI Connector and LTC/GPI Breakout Board .............................. B-4
Table B-4. Remote RJ-11 Control Connector Pinouts ............................................................. B-5
Table B-5. Router RJ-11 Control Connector Pinouts ............................................................... B-5
xiv
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Contents
Table B-6. ETHERNET RJ-45 Connector Pinouts ...................................................................B-6
Table B-7. USB Connector Pinouts ..........................................................................................B-6
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
xv
Contents
Blank Page
xvi
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Section 1 ♦ Introduction
The Videotek VTM Series multi-format, HD/SD-SDI video monitoring unit is the most
advanced, versatile, and intuitive HD/SD-SDI monitoring instrument available today.
With 100% digital signal processing technology, the VTM Series provides an accurate
and stable user customizable display of multiple Waveform, Vector, Gamut, Audio,
Picture, Relative Timing, Alarm Status, and Data Analyzer functions in quadrant or
full-screen views. Quick setup and parameter changes are possible with direct access
to display functions and screen location, 16 presets, context sensitive pop-up menus,
and an intuitive navigation system.
The VTM Series units can be completely customized. The VTM-ASX (console that
contains the system board) is capable of analyzing HD, SD, and Analog formats. The
VTM-OPT-10 or VTM-OPT-40 can be loaded into the unit. Any two of the VTM
video input boards can be loaded into the unit. Any one VTM-A3 Audio Options can be
loaded into the unit.
The VTM Series features extensive audio and video alarm capabilities including peak
level reporting, video and Dolby® metadata, EIA-608 and 708 closed caption
detection/alarm display, and teletext and XDS processing. All real-time signal alarms
have user adjustable limits, time stamps from LTC, DVITC, or an internal clock, and
logging may include an active link to a frame capture or Dolby® metadata capture
where applicable. Remote interfaces include 10/100BaseT Ethernet and plug-n-play
USB port (supporting storage and recall of presets, frame-capture transfer, and
keyboard/mouse integration). The TVM/VTM Series instruments are digital
instruments with all-digital architecture; therefore, no periodic calibration is required.
The VTM Series seamlessly integrates into any broadcast, post-production, camera
maintenance, satellite or cable facility, and is the ultimate choice for quality control,
troubleshooting, or compliance checking applications.
*
US Patents 6,069,607, 6,532,024, and 6,828,981. UK Patent 2,330,475. Other US and foreign patents pending.
Features include:
•
Dual HD/SD-SDI inputs with auto detection (VTM-4100)
•
Display multiple inputs simultaneously (VTM-OPT 40)
•
Pixel Locator/Data Word Analyzer/Camera Maintenance (TVM-AAP)
•
Dual Link (4:4:4) Y, CB, CR
•
A/B Parade and Overlay
•
Closed Caption detection, alarm, and display (608 and 708)
•
Customizable function display screen location, multiple displays
•
Alarms with Peak Level Report
•
Multiple reference inputs
•
Two USB ports for control and data transfer
•
XGA, High Resolution, output for 4:3 or 16:9 display (DVI-I)
•
Video Relative Timing display
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
1-1
Introduction
•
Patented Gamut display
•
16 user presets
•
Illuminated controls and indicators
•
Compact 1RU configuration
•
Ethernet with SNMP agent
•
Router control port
•
Input standards: SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M-C, NTSC, and PAL
The VTM Series is the perfect solution for the unattended signal quality monitoring of
multiple sites:
•
Satellite uplinks and downlinks
•
Remote transmitter sites
•
Tape-to-tape or tape-to-server transfers
•
NLE digitizing and rendering
•
Network and/or remote feeds
•
STL
•
Any HDTV node that requires quality analysis of video, audio, and time code
parameters
VTM Series Configuration
VTM Series Configurations are shown in the following subsections (Console, Graphics
Engines, Audio Options, Video Input Options, Auxiliary Options, and VTM Package
Configurations).
Console:
•
VTM-ASX - VTM Console that includes chassis, power supply, cooling system
fans, system controller, front panel controls with USB port, and back panel
connections for Ethernet, USB port, one router, one remote control port, and
LTC/GPI interface. Supports one graphics display engine, one or two video
boards, and one audio board. A graphics display engine module (VTM-OPT 10 or
VTM-OPT 40) and at least one input module are required to operate the console.
Graphics Engines (supports one):
•
VTM-OPT 10 - Graphics display engine that affords 100% digital signal
processing and instrument display capability of one input source at a time.
•
VTM-OPT 40 - Graphics display engine that affords 100% digital signal
processing and instrument display capability of four input sources simultaneously.
Audio Options (supports one):
•
VTM-A3-OPT 2 - Advanced Audio Analysis Option. Bargraphs and CineSound®.
View up to eight audio channels. Includes four analog stereo inputs, four
AES/EBU shared input/output pairs, and 16 channels of embedded audio. Analog
monitoring outputs of up to eight channels simultaneously.
1-2
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
•
VTM-A3-OPT 3 - Advanced Audio Analysis Option. Bargraphs and CineSound®.
View up to eight audio channels. Includes four analog stereo inputs, eight
AES/EBU inputs with four-shared outputs and 16 channels of embedded audio.
Analog monitoring outputs of up to eight channels simultaneously.
Channel-mapping, meter labels, and peak value reporting included.
•
VTM-A3-OPT 4 - Adds Dolby decoding to mix down analog output to A3-OPT 3.
•
VTM-A3-OPT 5 - Adds full Dolby decoding with up to eight analog outputs to
A3-OPT 3.
•
VTM-A3-4004 - Audio Expansion module. Adds four AES/EBU input pairs. Only
available with A3-OPT 2.
Video Input Options (supports two):
•
VTM-OPT AAP - Advanced Analysis Package that adds data analyzer functions
in quadrant or full-screen views to the VTM-OPT 10.
•
VTM-OPT ASI: Two (2) passive-looping DVB-ASI and SMPTE310 inputs. It
accepts two independent MPEG streams and analyzes one selected stream for
compliance to measurement guidelines of ETSI TR-101-290 (ETR-290) first,
second, and third priority standards.
•
VTM-OPT HD/SD - Two passive looping SMPTE 292M (HD-SDI) and SMPTE
259M-C (SD-SDI) inputs, auto detect, line select, internal, blackburst or tri-level
references.
•
VTM-OPT SD - Two passive looping SMPTE 259M-C (SD-SDI) inputs, auto
detect, and line select.
•
VTM-ACV-2 - Dual composite analog input module. Adds two composite analog
passive looping inputs (NTSC or PAL) with auto-detection and line select. Must
be used as inputs C and D.
•
VTM-OPT EYE-1 - Two active looping SMPTE 259M-C (SD-SDI) inputs, auto
detect with EYE pattern and monitor output. Must be used as inputs A and B.
•
VTM-OPT EYE-2 - Two active looping SMPTE 292M (HD-SDI) inputs, auto
detect with EYE pattern and monitor output. Must be used as inputs A and B.
Auxiliary Options:
•
RCU 1000 - Remote control panel for the VTM Series, TVM-900 series, and
TVM-800 series instruments. Replicates all of the front panel controls. RS-422
connection, includes 50’ (15m) straight-through cable with RJ-11 connectors. One
RU in height.
•
TVM-WRTY2 - Adds three years to the standard two-year warranty.
VTM Package Configurations:
•
VTM-3100 PKG – VTM Series package that includes the VTM-ASX (console),
VTM-OPT 10 (one input source), and VTM-OPT SD (standard definition) input.
The package is limited to SD formats, but can be upgraded. It displays one source
input at a time and one instance of each function (i.e.
Waveform/Vector/Picture/Gamut/…etc.). There is no Data Analysis.
The options that can be loaded for the VTM-3100 PKG are: TVM-OPT AAP
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
1-3
Introduction
(provides Data Analysis), VTM-OPT ASI, VTM-OPT 40 (affords ability for four
source inputs to be displayed simultaneously), VTM OPT HD/SD,
VTM-OPT EYE-1, VTM-OPT EYE-2, VTM-OPT ACV-2, and any VTM-A3 audio
option).
•
VTM-3100 PKG-A – VTM Series package that includes the VTM-ASX (console),
VTM-OPT 10 (one input source), and VTM-ACV-2 dual composite analog input
module. The package is limited Analog formats, but can be upgraded. It displays
one source input at a time and one instance of each function (i.e.
Waveform/Vector/Picture/Gamut/…etc.). There is no Data Analysis.
The options that can be loaded for the VTM-3100 PKG are: TVM-OPT AAP
(provides Data Analysis), VTM-OPT ASI, VTM-OPT 40 (affords ability for four
source inputs to be displayed simultaneously), VTM-OPT SD, VTM OPT HD/SD,
VTM-OPT EYE-1, VTM-OPT EYE-2, and any VTM-A3 audio option).
•
VTM-3100 PKG-E – VTM Series package that includes the VTM-ASX (console),
VTM-OPT 10 (one input source), and VTM- OPT EYE-1 input module. The
package is limited to SD formats, but can be upgraded. It displays one source input
at a time and one instance of each function (i.e.
Waveform/Vector/Picture/Gamut/…etc.). There is no Data Analysis.
The options that can be loaded for the VTM-3100 PKG are: TVM-OPT AAP
(provides Data Analysis), VTM-OPT ASI, VTM-OPT 40 (affords ability for four
source inputs to be displayed simultaneously), VTM-OPT SD, VTM OPT HD/SD,
VTM-OPT EYE-2, VTM-OPT ACV-2, and any VTM-A3 audio option).
•
VTM-4100 PKG – VTM package that includes the VTM-ASX (console), VTMOPT 10 (one input source), and one VTM-OPT HD/SD input. There are no format
limitations on the VTM-4100 PKG. It displays one source input at a time, and one
instance of each function (i.e. waveform/vector/gamut etc). There is no Data
Analysis.
The options that can be loaded for the VTM-4100 PKG are: TVM-OPT AAP
(provides Data Analysis), VTM-OPT 40 (affords the ability for four source inputs
simultaneously), VTM-OPT ASI, VTM-OPT EYE-2, VTM-OPT SD, VTM-OPT
HD/SD, VTM-OPT ACV-2, and any VTM-A3 Audio option.
•
VTM-4100 PKG-E – VTM package that includes the VTM-ASX (console),
VTM-OPT 10 (one input source), and one VTM-OPT EYE-2 input module. There
are no format limitations on the VTM-4100 PKG. It displays one source input at a
time, and one instance of each function (i.e. waveform/vector/gamut etc). There is
no Data Analysis.
The options that can be loaded for the VTM-4100 PKG are: TVM-OPT AAP
(provides Data Analysis), VTM-OPT ASI, VTM-OPT 40 (affords the ability for
four source inputs simultaneously), VTM-OPT SD, VTM-OPT HD/SD, VTM-OPT
ACV-2, and any VTM-A3 Audio option.
1-4
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Video Standards Supported
The VTM Series supports the following video standards:
For HD/SD Option:
•
1080i/60
•
1080i/59.94
•
1080i/50
•
1080p/30
•
1080p/29.97
•
1080p/25
•
1080p/24
•
1080p/23.98
•
1080p/30sF
•
1080p/29.97sF
•
1080p/25sF
•
1080p/24sF
•
1080p/23.98sF
•
720p/60
•
720p/59.94
•
720p/50
•
720p/30
•
720p/29.97
•
720p/24
•
720p/23.98
•
525/59.94
•
625/50
For SD Option:
•
525/59.94
•
625/50
For ACV Option:
•
NTSC
•
PAL
The VTM Series front and back panels are illustrated in Figure 1-1.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
1-5
Introduction
Figure 1-1. VTM Series Front and Back Panels
1-6
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Service and Support
For service support, telephone the Customer Service Department at 610-327-2292. If
the problem cannot be resolved over the telephone and the instrument must be shipped
to Videotek for service or repair:
•
Obtain a Return Authorization (RA) number from the Videotek Customer Service
Department.
•
Attach a tag to the unit with:
−
Your company name, address, and telephone number
−
The name of the contact person at your company
−
The RA number
−
The unit serial number
−
An explanation of the problem
•
To prevent shipping damage, pack the unit the same way Videotek had packed it.
If possible, use the original packing materials in the original shipping container.
•
Ship the unit to:
Videotek, Inc.
243 Shoemaker Road
Pottstown, PA 19464-6433
Attn: Service Dept.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
1-7
Introduction
Blank Page
1-8
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Section 2 ♦ Installation
This section provides information about inspecting, installing, and configuring the
VTM Series.
Inspecting the Shipment
Before installing the VTM SERIES, inspect the box and the contents. Report any
damage to the shipper and telephone the Videotek Customer Service Department for
service and support (see Section 1, “Service Support”).
NOTE: Refer to the enclosed packing sheet for the latest list of items that are supplied with the unit.
The box contains the following:
•
One VTM Series
•
One VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
•
One 75Ω terminator
•
One detachable power cord
•
One breakout connector (for LTC/GPI)
•
DVI to VGA adaptor
•
SpyderWeb II Installation CD
•
SpyderWeb II Installation Guide
•
If the audio option has been purchased, one additional breakout connector or 37-pin
connector is also supplied
Save the box and packing material for any future shipping requirements.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
2-1
Installation
Rack Mounting the VTM Series
When selecting the permanent mounting location for the VTM Series, ensure that the
flow of air to the ventilation holes on the sides of the chassis is not obstructed. Rack
mounting the VTM Series is illustrated in Figure 2-1. The parts required to rack
mount the VTM Series are listed in Table 2-1.
Figure 2-1. Mounting the VTM Series in a Rack
Table 2-1. Parts Required to Rack Mount the VTM Series using the DRC-2
Key
Item Number
Quantity
Description
1
831030
8 (4 for each side)
Hardware screw, 10-32 x 3/4 PP black
2
831019
4 (2 for each side)
Hardware washer, nylon, .437 x .195 x
.032
3
832076
2 (1 for each side)
Metal rack extension bracket
4
831060
4 (2 for each side)
HDW KNUT 10-32
Attach the rack extension brackets to the back of the rack. Once the extension brackets
are in place, guides on the VTM Series unit enable it to slide in and out of rack
extension brackets for easy access and removal.
2-2
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Installation
Connecting the VTM Series
The back panel connectors are illustrated in Figure 2-2, and the function of each
connector is described in Table 2-2.
Figure 2-2. VTM Series Back Panel Connectors
Table 2-2. Description of Back Panel Connectors
Key
Label
Description
1
DIGITAL AUDIO IN/OUT
1, 2, 3, 4 (IN/OUT),
5, 6, 7, 8 (IN ONLY)
Optional female BNC connectors for AES/EBU and Dolby Digital audio input
and shared AES outputs.
2
DIGITAL AUDIO
OUTPUT
Female BNC connector for Dolby audio output.
3
ANALOG AUDIO
IN/OUT
37-pin, D-sub, male connector for analog audio inputs and outputs. The
supplied breakout board can be used for solderless connections.*
INPUT A (IN, OUT)
Female BNC looping HD or SD SDI input and output connector. Termination
required.
INPUT B (IN, OUT)
Female BNC looping HD or SD SDI input and output connector. Termination
required.
INPUTS C, D
Female BNC connectors for optional inputs. Holes are plugged if option is
not installed.
A/B MON OUT
Female BNC connector for monitoring of the selected A or B input. If both
digital A + B inputs are selected, then the output is input A. This output is a
source monitor only and does not include the waveform, vector, audio, or
alarm on-screen information.
C/D MON OUT
NOTE: With VTM-OPT ASI Inputs C and D cannot be selected
simultaneously.
4
5
6
7
Female BNC connector for monitoring of the selected C or D input (SDI
only). If both C + D inputs are selected, then the output is input C. This
output is a source monitor only and does not include the waveform, vector,
audio, or alarm on-screen information.
8
9
10
REF (A, B)
External reference input accepting blackburst and tri-level sync. Termination
required for loop mode.
LTC/GPI
26-pin, high-density, female, D-sub connector for LTC, Clock, GPI, and
TALLY input.*
*See Appendix C, “Pinouts,” for the connections.
(Table continues on next page)
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
2-3
Installation
Table 2-2. Description of Back Panel Connectors (continued)
Key
Label
Description
11
REMOTE
RJ11 socket to connect to the remote control panel.*
12
ROUTER
RJ11 socket to control routing switchers.*
USB
USB 1.1 port to support memory device for recall and storage of presets,
DISP freezes, and SDI data freezes. It also supports flash updates, mouse,
and keyboard functionality.
ENET
RJ45, female, 10/100 BaseT connection.*
DVI-I OUT
DVI-I output used to connect to a monitor with a digital video interface. An
adaptor is supplied with the VTM Series to connect a standard XGA monitor
to the DVI output.
DVI-I IN
DVI-I connector for a digital video interface source.
13
14
15
16
*See Appendix C, “Pinouts,” for the connections.
Ethernet Setup
1. Prior to the VTM Series Network configuration, obtain Transmission Control
Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) addresses from the System Administrator or
from the Internet Service Provider (ISP).
These addresses are:
•
A static IP address (unless Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) will
be used)
•
A Subnet Mask
•
An optional Gateway IP
Be sure to record all addresses. The Gateway address is only needed if the VTM
Series is routed to an outside network.
Record the addresses:
VTM Series Interface Static IP Address
VTM Series Interface Subnet Mask
Gateway IP Address
2. Identify a host PC to configure and test the VTM Series.
3a. For a dedicated PC connection, connect the host PC with a network card to the
“ETHERNET” connector on the back panel of the VTM Series, using a CAT5
crossover cable (not included). See Figure 2-3.
2-4
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Installation
Figure 2-3. VTM Series Dedicated PC Connection
3b. For a network connection, connect the network hub to the back panel of the VTM
Series using a CAT5 network cable (not included). See Figure 2-4.
Figure 2-4. VTM Series Network PC Connection
4. Ethernet Configuration
a) Press the SETUP button on the VTM front panel.
b) Press the UP/DOWN button to highlight the COMMUNICATIONS menu, and
then press the ENTER button to enter the submenu.
c) Press the UP/DOWN button until the IP CONFIGURATION submenu is
highlighted.
d) Press the ENTER button or UP/DOWN knob to enter the IP
CONFIGURATION submenu.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
2-5
Installation
e) (If using DHCP) Press the LEFT/RIGHT button to highlight DHCP. When
DHCP is highlighted, press the UP/DOWN button to toggle the state to ON.
Press the RIGHT or LEFT buttons to highlight ACCEPT, and then press ENT.
The IP Address is retrieved from the DHCP server and placed under the
appropriate submenu.
(If not using DHCP) Press the LEFT/RIGHT button to select IP ADDRESS.
Press the UP/DOWN button to change the value selected, and press the
LEFT/RIGHT button to highlight the next value. Repeat for the remainder of
the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway. To avoid conflicts, the static IP
Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway should be obtained from the System
Administrator.
f) Press LEFT/RIGHT to highlight ACCEPT, and press ENT to accept the
entered values.
g) Press the EXIT button to exit the submenu.
Configuring the VTM Series for Remote Control
The configuration shown in Figure 2-5 is for one PC running multi-connection
software and equipped with a Network Interface Card (NIC) connected to multiple
VTMs. The interconnecting cables can be extended using electronic distribution.
Figure 2-5. Multiple VTM Series Network PC Connection
2-6
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Installation
Configuring the VTM/TVM Series with the RCU 1000 Remote
Control
For the following configurations, the interconnecting cables can be extended using
electronic distribution. There are two ways to configure the VTM/TVM Series with
the RCU 1000 remote control:
•
One RCU 1000 connected to one VTM/TVM Series unit using the REMOTE port.
•
One RCU 1000 connected to multiple VTM/TVM Series using a multidrop cabling
adaptor and straight through cable using RJ-11 connectors (not a standard
telephone wire) that connects to the REMOTE ports on the back of the VTM/TVM
Series units and to the TO MAIN UNIT connector on the back of the RCU. All
VTM/TVM Series units must have unique unit IDs. The unit ID is the
identification number of the VTM/TVM Series units, and can be set to any number
within a range of 1 to 99 in the COMMUNICATIONS menu. The unit IDs should
be different than the identification numbers of other units in the same system
configuration. The REMOTE port must be terminated on the last VTM/TVM
Series unit, as shown in Figure 2-6. The flat cable shown in Figure 2-6 is a
straight through cable. See the RCU 1000 Installation and Operation Handbook
for more information on the RCU 1000.
Figure 2-6. Connecting the RCU 1000 Remote Control Panel to Multiple VTM/TVM Series Units
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
2-7
Installation
Using the Bypass Feature
The Bypass feature can be used in conjunction with an existing PC and monitor to save
space and improve system efficiency, as illustrated in Figure 2-7. For the appropriate
connectors, see Figure 2-2 on page 2-3.
Figure 2-7. Using the Bypass Feature
BYPASS can be used to switch the monitor display from the PC output to the VTM
Series output.
2-8
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Section 3 ♦ General Operation
Terms
Pane: One quadrant in a multi-quadrant screen (Quad or Multi).
Display: The output that appears on the DVI/XGA monitor.
Quad: Screen that contains four panes.
Full: Full-screen display of the selected pane (non quad or multi display).
Multi: Contains preconfigured screens (for VTM Classic, Data Analyzer, Custom
Timing, and Waveform-Vector screens only).
Introduction to Operating the VTM Series
The VTM Series, shown and described in Figure 3-1, can contain up to four selectable
panes on the screen, in standard quad mode each of which provides a user-selectable
customized display of waveform, vector, gamut, audio, picture, relative timing, alarm
status, or data analyzer functions. A sample quad screen with the lower-right pane
selected is shown in Figure 3-2.
Certain buttons function differently according to the selected pane. Once the pane and
function for the pane is determined, more detailed settings can be configured. This
section focuses on the operation of the VTM Series according to the selected display.
Figure 3-1. VTM Series Front Panel*
*NOTE: Pressing and holding certain buttons will activate menus for additional functionality.
NOTE: In the inputs groups, press the A and B or C and D buttons at the same time to display inputs
A-B or C-D simultaneously if they are the same format.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-1
General Operation
Figure 3-2. Sample Multi-Display
Types of Controls
The VTM Series is controlled in three ways:
•
Quick Controls: controls on the front panel that adjust the parameters that are
frequently used.
•
Pane Menu Settings: Pop-up menus within a pane that are used to control the
parameters for the individual pane.
•
Global Setup Menu Settings: Setup menu parameters that affect the entire unit
(not pane specific). The Setup menu is accessed by pressing the SETUP button.
Front Panel Illumination
The front panel controls are illustrated in Figure 3-1. Most buttons and text are in a
low tally (low illumination) state, but some buttons and text reach a high-tally (high
illumination) state under certain conditions, as described in Table 3-1. If an option is
not installed, the associated button illumination is OFF. The high and low tally
illumination level can be set in the SYSTEM\CONTROL ILLUMINATION menu.
NOTE: Multiple buttons may be high tally for a pane at the same time. The last control selected that
uses the curved arrow knob in the pane is the active control for that pane.
3-2
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Table 3-1. Description of Front Panel Controls Illumination
Heading (Group)
Description
BYPASS
Press to toggle BYPASS on and off:
When BYPASS is off (the BYPASS button is low tally), the DVI output is
the VTM Series.
When BYPASS is on (the BYPASS button is high tally), the DVI input
signals are routed to the DVI Out connector. If EXIT BYPASS ON
ALARM is enabled in the SYSTEM Setup menu, Bypass is disabled
when an active alarm occurs.
INPUTS
When the button is high tally the input is selected and displayed in a
pane. When the button is low tally the input is not selected for the
selected pane. For C and D, the button does not illuminate when the
option is not installed.
When the input buttons are pressed simultaneously, both buttons (A and
B or C and D) are high tally.
FREEZE
DISP: The button is high tally when the entire XGA display is frozen.
The button is low tally when the XGA display is in live mode.
SDI: The button is high tally when one frame of raw data is stored and
displayed. The button is low tally when XGA display is in live mode.
GAIN
STEP: When the button is high tally, X2.5, X5, or X15 is active. When
the button is low tally, X1 gain is active.
VAR: The button is high tally when variable adjustment can occur. The
button is low tally when variable adjustment is not available.
ZOOM: The button is high tally in any zoom mode (indicated with zoom
at the top of the pane). The button is low tally when not in zoom mode.
SWEEP
H: The button is high tally when the waveform pane is active and in
horizontal sweep mode; otherwise, the button is low tally.
V: The button is high tally when the waveform pane is active and in
vertical sweep mode; otherwise, the button is low tally.
MAG: The button is high tally when the MAG function is enabled in the
selected waveform pane; otherwise, the button is low tally.
DISPLAY
FULL: The button is high tally when a full-screen is displayed.
MLT: The button is high tally when multi-screen mode is selected.
Pane Select buttons: The button is high tally to indicate which pane is
selected.
FUNCTIONS
SETUP
A function button is high tally to indicate the active function for the selected
pane.
SETUP: The Setup button is high tally whenever a Setup or pane menu
is displayed.
EXIT: The button is high tally when in a setup menu.
NAVIGATION
SETUP KNOBS
All buttons are high tally when in a setup menu.
RIGHT/LEFT Arrows: the arrows are high tally whenever the Pane or
Setup menu is enabled.
UP/DOWN Arrows: the arrows are high tally whenever the Pane or
Setup menu is enabled.
CURVED ARROW
KNOB
The curved arrow symbol is high tally whenever the knob has a directed
function for Cursor, Line Select, Variable Gain, Vector Phase, Audio Output
Level, or Setup or Pane menu control. The last control selected that uses the
curved arrow knob is the active control for that pane.
(Table continues on next page)
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-3
General Operation
Table 3-1. Description of Front Panel Controls Illumination (continued)
Heading (Group)
Description
LINE: the button is high tally when Line Select mode is enabled.
MODE
PHASE: the button is high tally when phase control mode is enabled.
CURS: the button is high tally when cursor mode is enabled.
1 – 8: the selected preset is high tally when stored or recalled except for
preset *8. A preset must contain settings in order to be selected for
recall.
PRESETS
*: the button is high tally when the second bank of presets is active
(presets *1 through *8). The button is low tally for the first bank of
presets when active (presets 1 through 8). *8 is the factory default
preset.
Sleep Mode
Press and hold the ENT and DOWN NAVIGATION button to enter and exit sleep
mode. When entering sleep mode, the instrument will turn off all LEDs and the
display. The instrument is still active (i.e. alarms still triggered, etc.). When exiting
sleep mode, the instrument returns to an illuminated state.
Selecting a Pane
When multiple panes are displayed, only one pane can be selected at a time. The active
pane is highlighted with a bright colored border. Press the desired Display button to
select the active pane to be configured, as shown in Figure 3-3.
Figure 3-3. Selecting a Pane
Full-Screen Display Selection
Press the FULL button in the display group to show a full-screen view of a
selected pane. The full-screen display encompasses the entire screen. No
other pane is displayed. Press the FULL button again to return to the Quad
view.
Press the MLT button to access the multi-screen display. The Multi-Screen
Display Selection information is found on page 3-78.
3-4
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Selecting an Input for a Pane
NOTE: Input C and D buttons will not function if an option is not installed.
Press the Input buttons to select input A, B, A+B, C, D, or C+D. Press
the two input buttons (A and B or C and D) simultaneously to produce
A+B or C+D overlay if they are the same format. When an input is
selected, pressing another input button will change to the new input
from the previous input.
There are two modes for selecting inputs: Linked and unlinked mode.
•
When Linked: All panes change when a new INPUT button is pressed.
•
When not Linked: Only the selected pane changes the input when a new input is
selected.
Format Mismatch Message
When selecting A+B or C+D while the inputs are in different formats, the message
FORMAT MISMATCH is displayed. The inputs must be changed to the same video
format if both inputs are to function simultaneously.
Linking Panes
Hold the A, B, C, or D input button for two seconds to enable the Link inputs pop-up
menu selection. When the LINK INPUTS menu box appears, press the ENT button to
toggle the selection. When linked, all the panes change to the selected input. If the
panes are not linked to an input, the broken link icon appears on top of the menu bar.
Selecting the Function for the Pane
Once a pane is selected, press the function button to select Waveform, Vector, Audio,
Picture, Alarm, Gamut, Timing, Eye (only works with Inputs A and B), or Option for
the pane. Press and hold the function button to display the pane menu.
Function Not Allowed Message
When a button is pressed that cannot be utilized with the selected Function (Waveform,
Vector, etc.), the message FUNCTION NOT ALLOWED briefly appears over the
center of the screen.
Option Not Installed Message
When a button is pressed for an option that is not installed, the message OPTION NOT
INSTALLED briefly appears over the center of the screen.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-5
General Operation
Navigating the Pane Setup menu
NOTE: A function button can be pressed to exit from the menu. If a different function than the
displayed function is pressed, the display will change to the newly selected function.
Use the NAVIGATION buttons or the SETUP POSITION knobs to navigate the Pane
menu. The SETUP POSITION knobs and Navigation buttons are described below:
Press to exit the menu.
Press to exit the pane menu.
Press to select a menu item or open a menu or submenu.
Press to move up in the menu or submenu.
Press to move right to the next submenu.
Press to move out of the submenu.
Press to move down in the menu or submenu.
- Rotate the knob to move the menu cursor up and down or to change a
value or condition in a menu.
- Press the knob to exit the menu.
- Rotate the knob to enter or exit the submenus.
- Press the knob to select a menu item or move to the submenu.
3-6
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Rotate the knob to move the menu cursor up and down.
External Reference
Press to select the external reference selection INT or EXT. The
INTERNAL reference is the built in reference. The EXT modes are:
•
Input B or A = BB (Blackburst) or TRI (Tri-level sync) (when LOOP is selected in
the EXT menu). If used, terminate with a 75 Ω terminator.
•
Input A = BB (when SPLIT BB is selected in the EXT menu)
•
Input B = TRI (when SPLIT TRI is selected in the EXT menu)
The default reference selection is INT. To change the external reference selection:
1. Press and hold the EXT button to access the External Reference menu. Table 3-2
shows the EXT menu selections.
2. When EXTERNAL REFERENCE is highlighted, press the RIGHT NAVIGATION
button to open the menu selections.
3. Press the UP or DOWN NAVIGATION to highlight the reference, and press the
ENT button to select the reference.
4. Press EXIT to exit the menu.
Table 3-2. EXT menu
EXTERNAL
REFERENCE
LOOP (Default)
SPLIT – FOLLOW
SPLIT – BB
SPLIT - TRI
SETUP
Press ENT
External Reference
The External Reference submenu is used to set the external reference input as a looping
input (one input) or a split input (two inputs). The selections are:
•
If LOOP is selected, the external reference selection has no effect.
•
If SPLIT - FOLLOW is selected while in split-mode, the external reference will be
Blackburst for SD and Tri-level for HD.
•
If SPLIT- BB is selected in split mode, then external reference A is used.
•
If SPLIT- TRI is selected in split mode, then external reference B is used.
When in External Reference (REF:EXT) and in a cross reference condition (e.g. HD
referenced to BB, or SD referenced to TRI), the waveform will not roll if the frame
rates match. A horizontal offset shows the timing difference between the External
Reference and the input signal at the start of the frame.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-7
General Operation
EXT Setup
Press the ENT button to access the global Setup menu. For more information on the
global Setup menu see Section 4.
Pane Overview
There are various screens for the VTM Series: full-screen display, Quad (4 display
panes), and multi (2 to 4 display panes). Even if the screen is full screen, quad, or
multi screen, the pane contains the Main Title Bar, the display, and the status bar. A
diagram of the quad display is shown in Figure 3-4. A diagram of the full-screen
display is shown in Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-4. Sample Quad Diagram
Figure 3-5. Full-Screen Display Diagram
Main Title Bar
The main title bar is displayed at the top of the screen, and contains the company name,
date and time, icon indictors, most current alarm (alarm background color is yellow
when active), and the model name.
3-8
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Icons
Icons appear in the main title bar and are shown in a specified order (left to right).
Table 3-3 shows the icons and the condition for the appearance:
Table 3-3. Description of Icons
Icon
Condition
Panel Lock engaged
Aural Alert silenced (No Sound)
RCU connected and active. The RCU icon replaces the Alarm condition
active icon when the RCU is connected and active.
External USB device connected
Inputs not linked (broken link)
Alarm condition active
DISP or SDI data is frozen in memory. If a display is captured and in
memory, DISP overlays the icon. If SDI is captured and in memory, SDI
overlays the icon. If both DISP and SDI are captured and in memory, DISP
and SDI overlay the icon.
Status Bar
A status bar is located at the bottom of each pane. The status bar for each pane
displays information based on the function selected and configuration applied. See the
specific pane function section (Waveform, Vector, Audio, Picture, Alarm, Gamut,
Timing, Eye, and Option) for more detailed information on the status bar that is
displayed.
The Waveform Display
Pressing the WFM function button accesses the Waveform display for the selected
pane. The waveform graticule scales, units of measure, and critical amplitude limits
change according to the video format displayed. Table 3-4 shows the Units of
Measure that appear for a video format. Table 3-5 lists the critical amplitude limits,
which are indicated on the screen by special dashed lines for the video formats that can
be displayed.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-9
General Operation
Table 3-4. Video Formats and Units of Measure
Video Format
Unit of Measure
High Definition and Standard
Definition 525 and 625
Volts or Percent (Selectable)
Composite or Standard
Definition 525 displayed as
composite (NTSC)
IRE
Composite or Standard
Definition 625 displayed as
composite (PAL)
Units or Volts (Selectable)
Table 3-5. Video Formats and Critical Amplitude Limits
Video Format
Critical Amplitude Limits
High Definition and
Standard Definition
0.6125 V = upper 75% chroma limit
0.525 V = 75% luminance limit
0.350 V = 50% point; black for color difference channels
0.0875 V = lower 75% chroma limit
Standard Definition 525
as Composite (NTSC)
7.5 IRE – black level
A waveform display is shown in Figure 3-6 and described in Table 3-6. The figure
shows the location for the various waveform display fields.
Figure 3-6. Waveform Display Diagram
3-10
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Table 3-6. Description of Waveform Display Diagram
Field
Identifier
Field information
Nomenclature
1
Input
Displays the user-configurable source IDs for the input and
routers.
2
Format
Displayed as YCBCR, RGB, YRGB, or Composite (CMPST).
This can be selected in the HD FORMAT or SD FORMAT
submenu of the WFM Pane menu.
3
Filter
Displayed as FLT, LP, CHR, BOW (Bowtie), R-Y
This can be selected in the COMPOSITE or
COMPONENT FILTER submenu of the WFM Pane
menu.
4
Standard
Displays the Line Rate/Frame Rate [1080i/59.94]. This is
selected in the VIDEO FORMAT\VIDEO A though D
CONFIGURE menu.
5
Reference
Displays the reference as INT, EXT. Toggled by pressing the
EXT button.
6
Gain
Displays the selected gain. The Gain ranges are 0.5 to 15.0.
Change by pressing the STEP or VAR button.
7
Amplitude cursor readout
Displays the amplitude cursor as AMP and the selected
numerical value followed by the unit or measure (mV, units,
or IRE).
8
Time cursor readout
Displays the time cursor as TIME and the selected numerical
value followed by the unit or measure (µS).
9
Line select information
Line select is shown as Line number with the ODD or EVEN
field (odd or even field will only show for interlaced Video
Formats).
10
WFM graticule
Shows the WFM RGB, YCBCR, or Composite graticule. The
graticule is dependent upon the Video format, Zoom, and
scale selections.
11
Scale
Indicates the major graticule indications for time.
12
Zoom
Displays Zoom when enabled
Blank when Zoom is disabled
Press the ZOOM button to cycle through the ZOOM
modes.
Graticules are configured by selecting the Video Input Format along with the
appropriate Waveform Setup scale adjustment (Units, %, or Volts). The scales can
also change when ZOOM is pressed.
Figure 3-7 to Figure 3-9 illustrates some waveform graticules with the critical
amplitude limits for the video formats that can be displayed by the VTM Series. The
critical amplitude limits are indicated on the screen by special dashed lines.
NOTE: When in VAR mode for all waveform scales, the graticule scale and numeric identifiers will not
be shown. Only the graticule lines will be displayed.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-11
General Operation
Figure 3-7. RGB and YCBCR Graticule
Figure 3-8. RGB and YCBCR Zoom 0 mV Graticule
Figure 3-9. RGB and YCBCR Zoom 700 mV Graticule
3-12
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Waveform Front Panel Selections
The following buttons directly affect the waveform display.
Moving the Waveform using the Setup Knobs
Move the Waveform display relative to the graticule by using the LEFT and RIGHT
arrow Knob (for horizontal movement) and the UP and DOWN arrow knob (for
vertical movement), as shown in Figure 3-10. Press the LEFT/RIGHT (horizontal
direction) or UP/DOWN (vertical direction) arrow knob to center the waveform in the
particular direction. Centering the waveform can also be performed by using the
Waveform pane menu (by pressing and holding the WFM button).
Figure 3-10. Moving the Waveform
Sweep Buttons
The Sweep buttons are used to determine the sweep rate scale. The scale is displayed in
the upper-right area of the waveform pane, as shown in Figure 3-11.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-13
General Operation
Figure 3-11. Establishing the Sweep Scale
NOTE: A menu selection is available to produce a 4H or 4V waveform.
In the SWEEP group, press the H button to select one of the horizontal sweep
modes. Also, press the H button to step through each component in a signal.
The Components that are utilized with the H button can be selected and
deselected in the COMPONENT SEQUENCE pane menu. When one to four
components are selected, press the H button to view 1H (1 Horizontal or 5.0 µS when
one component is shown). With one component selected, press the H button to toggle
between viewing one single component H waveform and multiple component H
waveforms (with blanking turned off two simultaneous component H waveforms are
used to view any ancillary data).
When two components are selected in the COMPONENT SEQUENCE pane menu, press
the H button to view 1H or 2H (2 Horizontal or 10.0 µS when two simultaneous
components are shown). When three components are selected in the COMPONENT
SEQUENCE pane, press the H button to view 1H or 3H (3 Horizontal or 15.0 µS when
three simultaneous components are shown). When four components are selected in the
COMPONENT SEQUENCE pane, press the H button to view 1H or 4H (4 Horizontal or
20.0 µS when four simultaneous components are shown in YRGB).
NOTE: Vertical Sweep is disabled when in R-Y mode (ACV only).
Also in the SWEEP group, press the V button to select one of the vertical
sweep modes. The Components that are utilized with the V button can be selected and
deselected in the COMPONENT SEQUENCE pane menu. A/B mode will show only
one component from the selection of R, G, or B when in 2V mode. When one to three
components are selected, press the V button to view 1V (1 Vertical when one
component is shown). With one component selected, press the V button to toggle
between viewing one single component V waveform and two multiple component V
waveforms (with blanking turned off two simultaneous component V waveforms are
used to view any ancillary data).
When two components are selected in the COMPONENT SEQUENCE pane menu,
press the V button to view 1V or 2V (two Vertical when two simultaneous components
are shown). When three components are selected in the COMPONENT SEQUENCE
3-14
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
pane menu, press the V button to view 1V or 3V (three Vertical for SDI when three
simultaneous components are shown). When four components are selected in the
COMPONENT SEQUENCE pane menu, press the V button to view 1V or 4V (4
Vertical for SDI when four simultaneous components are shown).
Press the MAG button to change the horizontal magnification or to turn the
magnification OFF.
Gain Buttons
Gain is used to set the range of the vertical amplification in the video signal. The
standard gain in the video signal is x1. The VTM Series can be used to set the gain
amplification in the video signal using the Gain group of buttons. The gain setting
appears in the upper-left portion of the waveform pane, as shown in Figure 3-12.
Figure 3-12. Establishing the Gain
Press the STEP button to step through the available gain selections x1.0, x2.5,
x5.0, x15.0. Press and hold the STEP button to select the GAIN pane menu.
STEP button functionality is modified in the step pop-up menu. The selections
are:
•
Allow all
•
x1 and x2.5 (only)
•
x1 and x5 (only)
•
x1 and x15 (only)
Press VAR to access Waveform Variable Gain. Once the VAR button is
illuminated, the Waveform Variable Gain can be adjusted using the CURVED
ARROW KNOB. The gain is adjusted in increments of 0.01. The Variable
Gain range for a waveform will be x0.50 to x15.00.
Press the VAR button to exit variable gain mode.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-15
General Operation
If Variable Gain mode is selected while already in a fixed gain (such as x2.5 or x5) the
gain is set to the variable gain selected. When VAR is pressed to exit variable gain, the
gain returns to the previously fixed gain. Pressing the STEP button while in variable
gain returns the gain to x1.00.
Press the ZOOM button to cycle through one of three display options:
•
ZOOM positioned on the 0 IRE, 0 mV, or 0% graticule line
•
ZOOM positioned on the 100 IRE or 700 mV (or 800 mV for Eye Pattern), or
100% graticule line
•
Normal
At each zoom position, the graticule scale and waveform displays expand to provide
more resolution around the zoom point.
Placing the Waveform Display in Line Select Mode
NOTE: When inputs A and B are selected simultaneously within the same pane, the Line Select
function is not available.
Pressing the LINE button enables the selected pane to monitor a single line
of a video signal. This enables Line Select to monitor individual areas of the
entire image. To view a line in Line Select mode:
1. Press the LINE button to place the selected waveform display pane in Line Select
mode. At the bottom-center of the display, the pane displays the Line number and
Odd or Even field, as shown in Figure 3-13.
Figure 3-13. Establishing Line Select
NOTE: In a Progressive (p) format. Odd and even selection is not available.
2. Press the CURVED ARROW knob to alternate between the ODD and EVEN
fields.
3. Rotate the CURVED ARROW knob to select the line to be displayed.
3-16
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
When the panes are linked by the INPUT button, all WFM, VECT, and GAMUT panes
are selected when the LINE button is pressed. When a picture is displayed in one of the
panes, a marker across the picture approximates the displayed line position (+/- 1 line).
Waveform Cursor Selections
Cursors are available for precise measurement of waveform voltage and
waveform time. The Time Cursor indication is in the lower-right of the
pane, and the amplitude cursor indication is in the lower-left of the pane as
shown in Figure 3-14.
Figure 3-14. Establishing Cursor Select
To enable the time and/or amplitude cursors, press and hold the CURS button. Use the
NAVIGATION buttons or knobs to highlight Amplitude or Time. Once selected, press
the ENT button to enable it. Once one or both cursors are selected, press the EXIT
button to exit the CURS pane menu.
When the cursor is selected, a readout will appear at the bottom of the display. The
horizontal cursor is AMPLITUDE. The vertical cursor is TIME.
If both TIME and AMP are displayed, pressing the CURS button will select which
cursor to control. In all cases, the TIME or AMP numeric readout at the bottom of the
display indicates the difference between the REF and DELTA cursors. The active
cursor (REF, DELTA, or both) is shown with small arrows at both ends of the cursor.
Once a cursor is selected for control:
1. Press the CURVED ARROW knob to select the REF or DELTA cursor to control.
The REF line is the solid line, and the DELTA cursor is the dotted line.
2. Rotate the knob to move the REF or DELTA cursor to the desired location.
3. Press the knob for the next line. Rotate the knob to move the other line to the
desired location.
4. Press the knob a third time to control both the REF and DELTA cursors.
5. Repeat as necessary.
To exit the cursor function while leaving the cursors active, just select another mode in
the pane (i.e. Line Select, Variable Gain, etc.).
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-17
General Operation
Waveform Pane Menu Selections
Pressing and holding the WFM or DISPLAY PANE buttons in the active waveform
pane enables the pane menu. The Waveform Pane menu is described in Table 3-7 for
analog waveform monitoring, Table 3-8 for SD-SDI waveform monitoring, and
Table 3-9 for HD-SDI waveform monitoring. The submenus are different for each
format. Table 3-7 through Table 3-9 indicate the menu items that are available
with the selected formats.
NOTE: The component sequence selections are dynamically dependent on the SD or HD format
selection. The component selections will only be shown when the component formats are selected.
Table 3-7. Waveform (Analog) Menu Structure
COMPOSITE FILTER
FLT (FLAT)
LP (LOW PASS)
CHR (CHROMA )
F/LP (FLAT & LOW PASS)
R-Y
PARADE/OVERLAY
PARADE
OVERLAY
COMPONENT
SEQUENCE
NOT AVAILABLE
CENTER WAVEFORM
ENTER
WAVEFORM SETUP
Press ENT
Table 3-8. Waveform (SD-SDI) Menu Structure
COMPOSITE FILTER (for
digital formats)
COMPONENT FILTER
PARADE/OVERLAY
SD FORMAT
BLANKING
FLAT (FLT)
-
LOW PASS (LP)
-
CHROMA (CHR)
-
FLAT
-
LOW PASS
-
BOW (BOWTIE)
-
PARADE
-
OVERLAY
-
CMPST (COMPOSITE)
-
YcbCr
-
RGB
-
YRGB
-
BLANK ALL
-
SHOW SAV/EAV
-
SHOW ALL
(Table continues on next page)
3-18
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Table 3-8. Waveform (SD-SDI) Menu Structure (continued)
COMPONENT
SEQUENCE (related to
SD FORMAT selection)
If CMPST is selected - Not
Available
-
If YCBCR is selected (Y, CB,
CR)
ON
If RGB is selected (R, G, B)
ON
OFF
OFF
If YRGB is selected (Y, R G
B)
ON
CENTER WAVEFORM
Press ENT
-
WAVEFORM SETUP
Press ENT
-
OFF
Table 3-9. Waveform (HD-SDI) Menu Structure
COMPOSITE FILTER (for
digital formats)
COMPONENT FILTER
PARADE/OVERLAY
HD FORMAT
BLANKING
COMPONENT
SEQUENCE (related to
HD FORMAT selection)
FLAT (FLT)
-
LOW PASS (LP)
-
CHROMA (CHR)
-
FLT (FLAT)
-
LP (LOW PASS)
-
BOW (BOWTIE)
-
PARADE
-
OVERLAY
-
COMP (COMPOSITE)
-
YCBCR
-
RGB
-
YRGB
-
BLANK ALL
-
SHOW SAV/EAV
-
SHOW ALL
-
If CMPST is selected – Not
Available
-
If YCBCR is selected (Y, CB,
CR)
ON
If RGB is selected (R, G, B)
ON
OFF
OFF
If YRGB is selected (Y, R G
B)
ON
CENTER WAVEFORM
Press ENT
-
WAVEFORM SETUP
Press ENT
-
OFF
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-19
General Operation
Filter Selection
The filters available are dependent upon the input format. The filters available are:
•
Flat: No filtering.
•
Low Pass: Selects the Low Pass filter.
•
Chroma: Selects the Chroma filter.
•
R-Y: Selects the R-Y filter (selection available with TVM-OPT ACV-2 OPTION
only).
•
Bowtie: The bowtie filter is used to check the timing relationships between the
digital components. A bowtie test signal is required.
Parade and Overlay Selections
Multiple inputs can be displayed in a single pane.
•
When PARADE is selected, the components of the same input are shown next to
one another (i.e. Inputs Y, then CB, then CR in a YCBCR signal).
•
When OVERLAY is selected for a single input, the components of the input signal
are displayed over each other (i.e. R over G over B in an RGB signal). When
OVERLAY is selected for A & B, like components of each input are over each
other (i.e. R over R, G over G, and B over B). A & B cannot be displayed in
parade mode.
HD or SD Format
When in the Format menu, select one of the display formats: (Y)RGB, YCBCR, or
CMPST (Composite). The selected (Y) RGB, YCBCR, or CMPST text is indicated with
a check mark. Table 3-10 lists the relationships between the input and display formats.
Table 3-10. Input and Display Format Relationship
Input Format
RGB
YCBCR
YRGB
COMP
HD
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
SD
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Analog Composite
(Option)
No
No
No
Yes
Blanking (SD-SDI and HD only)
The blanking selections are Blank All, EAV/SAV, and Show All.
•
“Blank All” displays only the active video of the input signal.
•
“Show EAV/SAV” displays the active video and the EAV/SAV headers of the
input signal.
•
“Show All” displays the ancillary data, EAV/SAV, and active video.
3-20
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Component Sequence (SD-SDI and HD only)
Select to enable the component Y, CB, and CR when YCBCR is selected in the SD or
HD Format menu; Y, R, G, and B, when YRGB is selected in the SD or HD FORMAT
menu.
Center Waveform
Press the ENT button to activate the Center Waveform selection. Once ENT is
pressed, the waveform returns to the center of the waveform graticule.
Waveform Setup
Press the ENT button to access the global Waveform setup menu. For more
information on the global Waveform Setup menu see Section 4.
Utilizing the EYE Display (VTM-OPT EYE1 or EYE2
only)
NOTE: Available for Inputs A and B only.
The Eye Pattern display is created by sampling the serial digital signal with the
recovered serial clock. The Eye Pattern display is used to measure signal amplitude,
jitter, rise time, and other irregularities. Measurement of the transition widths is done
by manually setting the cursors on the transition limits of the display and reading the
offset in picoseconds (pS). The amount of jitter can also be estimated from the bar
display above the Eye Pattern display. Amplitude is similarly measured using cursors.
To access the Eye Pattern display, press the EYE function button on the front panel.
The Eye Pattern Display Diagram is displayed in Figure 3-15 and described in
Table 3-11.
Figure 3-15. Eye Pattern Display Diagram
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-21
General Operation
Table 3-11. Description of Eye Pattern Display Diagram
Field
Identifier
Nomenclature
Field information
1
Input
Displays the user-configurable source IDs for the input and
routers.
2
Standard
Line rate/Frame rate
3
Reference
Displays the reference as Int. (Internal) or Ext. (External)
4
Amplitude cursor readout
Displays the amplitude cursor as AMP and the number in mV
5
Time cursor readout
Displays the time cursor as Time and the number in pS
6
Scale
Displayed in pS
7
Zoom
Displays the Zoom when enabled
Blank when Zoom is disabled
Press the ZOOM button cycle through Zoom modes
8
EYE graticule
Displays the Eye Pattern graticule
9
Jitter Display
Displays the Jitter display. Jitter display changes according
to the EYE PATTERN\JITTER DISPLAY TYPE menu in the
Global Setup menu
Figure 3-16 to Figure 3-18 displays the Eye pattern graticules.
Figure 3-16. Eye Pattern Graticule
Figure 3-17. Eye Pattern Graticule at Zoom 0V
3-22
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Figure 3-18. Eye Pattern Graticule at Zoom 800 mV
Eye Pattern Observation
The waveform displayed can show both amplitude variations and timing variations.
The combination of these “closes” the decision window for determining whether a bit
received is “1” or “0”. Common errors including overshoot, bandwidth limitations,
and ringing are easily observed with the Eye Pattern display and provide indications of
the general quality of the transmission channel and source.
Eye Pattern Rise Time
Rise times of the waveform can be calculated by measuring the 20% to 80% rise time
points with the time cursors.
Jitter Meter and Eye Pattern Correlation
The jitter meter located just above the Eye pattern display is intended to display the
maximum value of jitter over time. The correlation of values derived by using
measurement cursors versus the jitter meter could differ unless the eye pattern is
displayed using the maximum persistence setting. A normal persistence setting will
make it more difficult to view pixels near the widest sample points, which forces the
placement of the measurement cursors to a lower (narrower) jitter value. Jitter can
only be selected when the Eye Pattern is enabled.
Horizontal Magnification and Zoom in Eye Pattern Mode
Gain is used to set the range of amplification in the video signal. The standard gain in
the video signal is x1. The VTM Series can be used to set the gain amplification in the
video signal using the Gain group of buttons. The gain setting appears in the upper-left
portion of the waveform pane, as shown in Figure 3-12.
Press the MAG button to step through the available Horizontal Magnifications
of x1, x5, and x10: 1 nS, .20 nS, and .10 nS for SD or 250 pS, 50 pS, and 25
pS for HD. The type of magnification along with the format displayed
determines how many “Eyes” are displayed. Table 3-12 describes the Horizontal
Magnification Conditions.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-23
General Operation
Table 3-12. Horizontal Magnification Conditions
Horizontal
Mag
x1 (1 nS
or 250 pS)
x5 (.20 nS
or 50 pS)
x10
(.10 nS or
25 pS)
Format
Displayed
Number of Eyes Displayed
SD/HD
3 eye displayed
SD
10 eyes displayed
HD
20 eyes displayed
SD/HD
3/5 eye displayed
SD
2 eyes displayed
HD
4 eyes displayed
SD/HD
3/10 eye displayed
SD
1 eye displayed
HD
2 eyes displayed
Press the ZOOM button to zoom around the reference graticule. At each zoom
position, the graticule scale and eye pattern displays expand to provide more
resolution around the zoom point.
Eye Pattern Cursor Selections
Cursors are available for precise measurement of waveform voltage and
waveform time. Press the CURS button on the front panel to enable the
cursors for the selected pane. The Time Cursor indication is in the
lower-right portion, and the amplitude cursor indication is in the lower-left of the
screen as shown in Figure 3-19.
Figure 3-19. Establishing Cursor Select for Eye Pattern
To enable the time and/or amplitude cursors, press and hold the CURS button. Use the
NAVIGATION buttons or knobs to select Amplitude or Time. Once selected, press
the ENT button to enable it. Once one or both cursors are selected, press the EXIT
button to exit the CURS pane menu.
3-24
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
When the cursor is selected, the indication will appear at the bottom of the display
along with the cursor line. The horizontal cursor line is the AMPLITUDE line. The
vertical line is the TIME line.
If both TIME and AMP are displayed, pressing the CURS button will select which
cursor to control. In all cases, the TIME or AMP numeric readout at the bottom of the
display indicates the difference between the REF and DELTA lines. The active line
(REF, DELTA, or both) is shown with small arrows at both ends of the line.
Once a cursor is selected for control:
1. Press the CURVED ARROW knob to select the REF or DELTA line to control.
The REF line is the solid line, and the DELTA line is the dotted line.
2. Rotate the knob to move the REF or DELTA line to the desired location.
3. Press the knob for the next line. Rotate the knob to move the other line to the
desired location.
4. Press the knob a third time to control both the REF and DELTA lines.
5. Repeat as necessary.
Once the cursors are no longer necessary, press and hold the CURS button to return to
the Cursor menu and disable the cursor selection submenus. The check mark indicates
the cursor is enabled, and no check marks indicate the cursor is disabled.
To exit the cursor function while leaving the cursors active, just select another mode in
the pane (i.e Line Select, Variable Gain, etc.).
Eye Pattern Pane Menu Selections
Pressing and holding the EYE function button or the DISPLAY PANE button in the
active Eye Pattern pane selects the pane menu. Use the SETUP POSITION knobs or
the NAVIGATION buttons to navigate the Pane menu.
The Eye Pattern Pane menu is described in Table 3-13 for SD-SDI monitoring, and
Table 3-14 for HD-SDI monitoring. The difference between the two menus is the
Trigger Mode selections of 10 EYE and 20 EYE.
Table 3-13. Eye SD-SDI Pane Menu Structure
JITTER HPF
10 Hz
100 Hz
1000 Hz
TRIGGER MODE
OVERLAY
10 EYE
EYE PATTERN SETUP
Press ENT
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-25
General Operation
Table 3-14. Eye HD-SDI Pane Menu Structure
JITTER HPF
10 Hz
100 Hz
1000 Hz
TRIGGER MODE
OVERLAY
20 EYE
EYE PATTERN SETUP
Press ENT
Jitter High Pass Filter (HPF) Selection
Because jitter on the data can develop from many sources and have a unique frequency
distribution, the bandwidth of the sampling clock recovery circuit will affect the
displayed jitter if the frequency of the jitter is within the bandwidth of the clock
recovery circuits. Above the loop bandwidth, the loop has no effect on the jitter.
While within the bandwidth, the apparent jitter displayed will be satisfied by the loop
response.
To access the jitter high pass filter selections, press the EYE button until Eye Pattern
pane menu appears. Select between 10 Hz, 100 Hz, or 1 kHz is high tally. When
10 Hz, 100 Hz, or 1 kHz is selected, the –3 dB response points only allow jitter above
the selected filter frequency. This is useful with estimating the effects of jitter on clock
recovery circuits of similar bandwidths in receivers and inferring the sources of the
observed jitter based on frequency components present.
Trigger Mode
The TRIGGER MODE submenu is located in the EYE PATTERN SETUP menu.
Within the TRIGGER MODE submenu, two modes of operation are available:
•
OVERLAY
•
10/20 EYE (10 Eye and Overlay for SD/20 Eye and Overlay for HD)
Distortions in Overlay mode are all displayed in the visible eye locations of the Eye
Pattern display, giving a more easily observed display of the total jitter. Overlay
displays three eye openings.
Eye Pattern Setup
Press the ENT button to access the global Eye Pattern setup menu. For more
information on the global Eye Pattern Setup menu see Section 4.
3-26
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Utilizing the Vector Display
Pressing the VECT button accesses the Vector display for the selected pane. A vector
display is shown in Figure 3-20 and described in Table 3-15. This illustrates the
general location for the various vector fields.
Figure 3-20. Vector Display Diagram
Table 3-15. Description of Vector Display Diagram
Field
Identifier
Field information
Nomenclature
1
Input
Displays the user-configurable source IDs for the input and
routers.
2
Format
Displayed as Composite and CBCR. This can be selected in
the HD FORMAT or SD FORMAT submenu of the VECTOR
Pane menu.
3
Standard
Displays the Line Rate/Frame Rate [1080i/59.94]. This is
selected in the VIDEO FORMAT\VIDEO A THRU D
CONFIGURE menu.
4
Reference
Displays the reference as INT, EXT. This is toggled by
pressing the EXT button.
(Table continues on next page)
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-27
General Operation
Table 3-15. Description of Vector Display Diagram (continued)
Field
Identifier
Field information
Nomenclature
5
Gain
Displays the gain where Gain is 1.00, 2.50, 5.00, or 15.00.
This is changed by pressing the STEP or VAR button.
6
Phase cursor readout
Displays the Phase cursor as PHASE and the number in
degrees.
7
Line select information
Line select is shown as Line and the number with the ODD or
EVEN field (odd or even field will only show for certain Video
Formats).
8
Vector Standard
Displayed as 75%, 100%, or 75% + 100% (HD only). This is
selected in the Vector Pane setup submenu called Analog
standard, SD standard, or HD standard.
9
Zoom
Zoom (when enabled)
Blank when disabled
Press the ZOOM button to cycle through the Zoom
modes.
10
Vector graticule
Shows the Vector graticule.
Graticules are configured by selecting the Video Input Format along with the
appropriate Vector Setup standard.
Some graticule scales are illustrated in Figure 3-21 to Figure 3-28.
Figure 3-21. Vector NTSC Graticule
3-28
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Figure 3-22. Vector NTSC Zoom Upper Left
Figure 3-23. Vector NTSC Zoom Upper Right
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-29
General Operation
Figure 3-24. Vector NTSC Zoom Lower Right
Figure 3-25. Vector NTSC Zoom Lower Left
3-30
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Figure 3-26. Vector PAL Zoom Center
Figure 3-27. Vector SD with I/Q
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-31
General Operation
Figure 3-28. Vector HD 75% + 100% Graticule
3-32
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Controlling the Vector
(For Composite analog video input only) A vector display has two
individual properties: phase and magnitude. To control the phase of the
vector, press the PHASE button and turn the CURVED ARROW knob.
The magnitude is controlled by the Variable Gain. Press the VAR button
and then use the CURVED ARROW knob. Variable gain can be used in all
formats.
Gain Buttons
The standard gain in the vector is x1.0. The VTM Series can be used to set the gain
amplification in the video signal using the Gain group of buttons. The gain setting
appears in the upper-left portion of the vector pane, as shown in Figure 3-29.
Figure 3-29. Establishing the Vector Gain
Press the STEP button to step through the available gain selections x1.0, x2.5,
x5.0, x15.0.
Press VAR to access Vector Variable Gain. Once the Waveform Variable
Gain is displayed on the screen, the Vector Variable Gain can be adjusted
using the CURVED ARROW KNOB. The gain is adjusted in increments of
0.01. The Variable Gain range is x0.50 to x50.00.
Press ZOOM to cycle through one of six displays:
•
Expand the center
•
Expand the upper-left quadrant
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-33
General Operation
•
Expand the upper-right quadrant
•
Expand the lower-right quadrant
•
Expand the lower-left quadrant
•
Normal
Vector Zoom is helpful when an increased resolution of phase or saturation is required.
Press and hold ZOOM to enable the zoom pop-up menu. This is used to modify the
functionality of the ZOOM button. Once selected, press ZOOM to toggle between the
selected zoom screen and the normal screen. If normal is selected in the Zoom menu,
then pressing ZOOM will step through each zoom display.
Placing the Vector Display in Line Select Mode
NOTE: When inputs A and B are selected simultaneously, the Line Select function is not available.
Pressing the LINE button enables the selected pane to monitor a single line
of a video signal. This enables Line Select to monitor individual areas of the
entire image. To view a line in Line Select mode:
1. Press the LINE button to place the selected vector display pane in Line Select
mode. At the bottom-center of the display, the pane displays the Line number and
Odd or Even field, as shown in Figure 3-30.
Figure 3-30. Establishing Line Select
NOTE: In a Progressive (p) format odd and even selection is not available.
2. Press the CURVED ARROW knob to alternate between the ODD and EVEN
fields.
3. Rotate the CURVED ARROW knob to select the line to be displayed.
When the inputs are linked, Line Select is a global setting. When the inputs are not
linked, Line Select is pane specific. When a picture is displayed in one of the panes, a
marker on the edge of the picture approximates the displayed line position (+/- 1 line).
Vector Cursor Selections
Cursors are available for precise measurement of vector phase (in degrees).
Press the CURS button on the front panel to enable the cursors for the
selected pane. The Phase Cursor indications are in the lower-left portion of
the screen as shown in Figure 3-31.
3-34
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Figure 3-31. Establishing Cursor Select
To enable the Phase cursors, press and hold the CURS button. Once the PHASE
pop-up menu appears on the screen, press the ENT button to enable it. Once the cursor
is selected, press the EXIT button to exit the CURS pane menu.
When the cursor is selected, the Phase indication appears. Beside the Phase indication
is a numeric readout that indicates the difference between the REF and DELTA lines.
The active line (REF, DELTA, or both) is shown with small arrows at the outer end of
the line.
Once a line is selected for control:
1. Press the CURVED ARROW knob to select the REF or DELTA line to control.
The REF line is the solid line, and the DELTA line is the dotted line.
2. Rotate the knob to move the REF or DELTA line to the desired location.
3. Press the knob for the next line. Rotate the knob to move the other line to the
desired location.
4. Press the knob a third time to control both the REF and DELTA lines.
5. Repeat as necessary.
Once the cursors are no longer necessary, press and hold the CURS button to return to
the Cursor menu and disable the Phase cursor selection. The check mark indicates the
cursor is enabled, and no check mark indicates the cursor is disabled.
To exit the cursor function while leaving the cursor active, just select another mode in
the pane (i.e. Line Select, Variable Gain, etc.)
Vector Pane Menu Selections
Pressing and holding the VECT function button or the DISPLAY PANE button in the
active vector pane selects the pane menu. Use the SETUP POSITION knobs or the
NAVIGATION buttons to navigate the Pane menu.
The Vector Pane menu is described in Table 3-16 for analog, Table 3-17 for SD-SDI
monitoring, and Table 3-18 for HD-SDI monitoring. The tables below indicate what
will function with the selected formats.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-35
General Operation
Table 3-16. Vector Analog Pane Menu Structure
ANALOG STANDARD
75%
100%
POSITION
USE H POS AND V POS KNOB. PRESS KNOB FOR
CENTER.
SETUP
Press ENT
Table 3-17. Vector SD-SDI Pane Menu Structure
SD STANDARD
75%
100%
SCALE SD TO
COMPOSITE
OFF
POSITION
USE H POS AND V POS KNOB. PRESS KNOB FOR
CENTER.
SETUP
Press ENT
ON
Table 3-18. Vector HD-SDI Pane Menu Structure
HD STANDARD
75%
100%
75% + 100%
SCALE HD TO
COMPOSITE
OFF
POSITION
USE H POS AND V POS KNOB. PRESS KNOB FOR
CENTER.
VECTOR SETUP
Press ENT
ON
Standard
NOTE: This selection also is reflected in the Gamut display for the selected pane.
Standard is used to set the marks on the vector display. The marks on the vector help
to visualize the minimum/maximum value of a video signal. The position of the
excursion marks are 75% or 100% for analog, SD, and HD. Also, the HD standard can
be selected as 75% and 100% simultaneously.
Scaled to Composite (SD and HD only)
Also, with an HD or SD signal, the Scaled to Composite menu can be used to scale the
SD or HD vector to reflect a composite format.
Vector Position (Centering the Vector)
Centering the vector should be a one-time calibration and can be done in composite
format. Centering of the vector can be accomplished by adjusting the Vector V
position and Vector H position in the VECTOR PANE menu.
3-36
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Vector Setup
Press the ENT button to access the global Vector setup menu. For more information
on the global Vector Setup menu see Section 4.
Gamut Display
A constant setback in video production is the difference between the allowable ranges
of dissimilar component and composite color spaces. Combinations of values that are
within the range of a color difference component video system produce signal
amplitudes outside the ranges when the signal is transcoded to composite or RGB color
space.
Pressing the GAMUT button accesses the gamut display for the selected pane. The
Gamut displays show RGB limits or composite video limits. Both Gamut displays
illustrate what colors are causing illegal excursions and whether these digressions are
above or below the allowable limits. The inputs are shown as an encoded display with
gamut alarms. A Digital Input must be selected in order to view the Gamut display.
The displays show RGB and composite video limits.
Vector excursion marks are displayed in the gamut displays. The excursion marks help
to visualize the minimum/maximum value of a 100% color bar signal. The position of
the excursion marks depend on the selected Video Format selection from the VIDEO
FORMAT\VIDEO A thru D CONFIGURE menu.
A gamut display diagram is shown in Figure 3-32 and described in Table 3-19. The
diagram illustrates the general location for the various gamut fields.
Figure 3-32. Gamut Display Diagram
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-37
General Operation
Table 3-19. Description of Gamut Display Diagram
Field
Identifier
Field information
Nomenclature
1
Input
Displays the user-configurable source IDs for the input and
routers.
2
Format
Displayed as Composite and RGB. This can be selected in
the HD FORMAT or SD FORMAT submenu of the GAMUT
Pane menu.
3
Standard
Displays the Line Rate/Frame Rate [1080i/59.94]. This is
selected in the VIDEO FORMAT\VIDEO A thru D
CONFIGURE menu.
4
Chroma alarm limits
Displayed as RGB (for RGB) and PEAK (for Composite)
5
Upper chroma alarm limit
Displayed as Upper = xxx yy.
For RGB xxx is the RGB Gamut upper threshold setting
and yy is shown as mV.
For Composite, xxx is the Peak upper threshold setting.
In Composite, yy is determined by the format (IRE for
NTSC and Units or mV for PAL).
6
Lower chroma alarm limit
Displayed as Lower = xxx yy.
For RGB xxx is the s the RGB Gamut lower threshold
setting, and yy as units.
For Composite, xxx is the Peak lower threshold setting.
In Composite, yy is determined by the format (IRE for
NTSC and Units for PAL).
7
Line select information
Line select is shown as Line and the number with the ODD or
EVEN field (when applicable).
8
Luma alarm limit
Displays Luma when Composite is selected. This field is
blank when RGB is selected.
9
Upper luma alarm limit
(Composite only)
Displayed as Upper = xxx yy. xxx is the Luma upper
threshold setting. YY is determined by the format (IRE for
NTSC and Units or mV for PAL).
10
Lower luma alarm limit
(Composite only)
Displayed as Lower = xxx yy. xxx is the Luma lower
threshold setting. yy is determined by the format (IRE for
NTSC and Units or mV for PAL).
11
Zoom
Zoom (when enabled)
Blank when disabled
Press the ZOOM button to cycle through the Zoom
modes
12
Luma/Mono bar graticule
Shows the Luma/Mono bar graticule
13
Gamut Graticule
Composite or RGB Gamut graticule.
Composite Gamut
The graticule for the composite gamut vector, as shown in Figure 3-33 and described
in Table 3-20, is two concentric circles with other identifiers. When setting the upper
and lower limits, the upper and lower gamut rings represent the values set from the
threshold values of the appropriate format. Set the 525 or 625 (check format) threshold
in the VIDEO ALARMS DIGITAL\DIGITAL GAMUT\PEAK GAMUT
(UPPER/LOWER) menu to move the gamut rings or LUMA GAMUT
(UPPER/LOWER)\THRESHOLD 525/625 menu to move the luma bar limits. The
3-38
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
outer circle (the UPPER gamut alarm limit) represents the highest allowable amplitude
in standard composite units (i.e. IRE for NTSC and units for PAL). The inner circle
(the LOWER gamut alarm limit) represents the lowest allowable amplitude. The rings
turn red when the alarm is enabled and the values exceed the threshold setting.
The other identifiers are radials that extend at the angle of the designated color. These
six lines follow the same displacement as the vector display. Note that since the PAL
display is derived solely from component information, there is not two phases for PAL
signals. The +V phase is used (making the vectors look similar to NTSC).
NOTE: There is an alarm persistence of two seconds associated with any alarm indication. After an
alarm has cleared, two seconds will pass before the gamut alarm indicator returns to normal.
Figure 3-33. Composite Gamut Vector Display Graticule Markings
Table 3-20. Description of Composite Gamut Indicators
Key
Indicator
Description
1
Lower Gamut Ring
The lower gamut ring indicates the Gamut alarm Peak Lower limit. When the
Gamut alarm is enabled and the Peak Lower limit is exceeded, the lower
gamut ring turns red.
2
Upper Gamut Ring
The upper gamut ring indicates the Gamut alarm Peak Upper limit. When the
Gamut alarm Peak Upper limit is exceeded, the upper gamut ring turns red.
3
Vector Excursion Mark
The excursion marks help to visualize the minimum/maximum value of 100%
color bars.
4
Luma Upper Limit Line
The Luma Upper Limit Line indicates the Gamut alarm Luma Upper limit.
When the Gamut alarm is enabled, and the Luma Upper limit is exceeded,
the luma upper limit line and LUMA turn red.
5
Luma Lower Limit Line
The Luma Lower Limit Line indicates the Gamut alarm Luma Lower limit.
When the Gamut alarm is enabled, and the Luma lower limit is exceeded, the
Luma Lower Limit line and LUMA turn red.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-39
General Operation
RGB Gamut Display
When setting the upper and lower limits, the upper and lower gamut rings represent the
threshold values. Set the threshold in the VIDEO ALARMS DIGITAL\DIGITAL
GAMUT\RGB (UPPER/LOWER)\THRESHOLD menu to move to gamut rings. The
RGB Gamut Display, shown in Figure 3-34 and described in Table 3-21, is similar to
the Composite Gamut Display. The RGB Gamut vector displays video amplitudes
(which are in mV) in a polar format to represent color information. The rings turn red
when the alarm is enabled and the values exceed the threshold setting.
Each R, G, and B pixel is plotted using amplitude and phase. The amplitude is derived
from the R, G, B component. The phase is derived from the CB CR information of the
digital signal. The pixels can be plotted as a single color or as each component color
(see the Gamut Setup menu in Section 4). Unlike the composite Gamut vector, which
plots two points per pixel, the RGB Gamut vector plots three points. Also, signals with
no color content are displayed on a separate bar graph labeled Mono.
The RGB graticule is nearly identical to the composite graticule. The only differences
are:
•
Amplitudes are displayed in mV rather than IRE or UNITS.
•
The radials representing color vectors are 60° apart since they are displayed in a
component color space.
•
Mono bar graph is for monochrome.
NOTE: There is an alarm persistence of two seconds associated with any alarm indication. After an
alarm has cleared, two seconds will pass before the gamut indicator returns to normal.
Figure 3-34. Component Gamut Vector Display Graticule Markings
3-40
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Table 3-21. Description of RGB Gamut Indicators
Key
Indicator
Description
1
Lower Gamut Ring
The lower gamut ring indicates the RGB Gamut alarm Lower limit. When the
RGB Gamut alarm is enabled and the Lower limit is exceeded, the lower
gamut ring turns red.
2
Upper Gamut Ring
The upper gamut ring indicates the RGB Gamut alarm Upper limit. When the
RGB Gamut alarm is enabled, and the Upper limit is exceeded, the upper
gamut ring turns red.
3
Vector Excursion Mark
The excursion marks help to visualize the minimum/maximum values of
100% color bars.
4
Mono
Mono indicates the monochrome of the RGB signal. There is no alarm
associated with Mono.
Placing the Gamut Display in Line Select Mode
Pressing the LINE button enables the selected pane to monitor a single line
of a video signal. This enables Line Select to monitor individual lines of the
entire image. To view a line in Line Select mode:
1. Press the LINE button to place the selected Gamut display pane in Line Select
mode. At the bottom-right of the display, the pane displays the Line number and
Odd or Even field, as shown in Figure 3-35.
Figure 3-35. Establishing Line Select
NOTE: In a Progressive (p) format odd and even selection is not available.
2. Press the CURVED ARROW knob to alternate between the ODD and EVEN fields
for interlaced formats.
3. Rotate the CURVED ARROW knob to select the line to be displayed.
When the inputs are linked, Line Select is a global setting. When the inputs are not
linked, Line Select is pane specific. When a picture is displayed in one of the panes, a
marker across the picture approximates the displayed line position (+/- 1 line).
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-41
General Operation
Gamut Zoom
Press ZOOM to cycle through one of six displays of the Composite or RGB
gamut graticule:
•
Expand the center
•
Expand the upper-left quadrant
•
Expand the upper-right quadrant
•
Expand the lower-right quadrant
•
Expand the lower-left quadrant
•
Zoom off
Press and hold ZOOM to select the zoom pop-up menu. This menu is used to modify
the ZOOM button. Once selected, press ZOOM to toggle between the selected zoom
screen and the Normal screen. If NORMAL is selected in the ZOOM menu, pressing
ZOOM steps through each zoom display.
Gamut Pane Menu Selections
Pressing and holding the GAMUT function button or the selected DISPLAY PANE
button in the active gamut pane selects the pane menu. The Gamut Pane menu is
described in Table 3-22.
Table 3-22. Gamut Menu Structure
COLOR SPACE
RGB
CMPST
GAMUT SETUP
Press ENT
Color Space
Color Space is used to determine the type of gamut graticule that appears in the pane.
Selecting RGB displays the RGB gamut graticule. Selecting CMPST displays the
Composite gamut graticule.
Gamut Setup
Press the ENT button to access the global Gamut setup menu. For more information
on the global Gamut Setup menu see Section 4.
Picture Display
The picture display pane is used to show the picture of the selected input. Press the
PICT button to display the picture in the selected pane. A Picture display diagram is
shown in Figure 3-36 and described in Table 3-23. The number of pictures that can be
displayed is restricted to one, either as a thumbnail, pane, or full-screen.
3-42
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Figure 3-36. Picture Display Diagram
Table 3-23. Description of Picture Display Diagram
Field
Identifier
Field information
Nomenclature
1
Input
Displays the user-configurable source IDs for the input and
routers.
2
Standard
Displays the Line Rate/Frame Rate [1080i/59.94]. Select the
Standard in the VIDEO FORMAT\VIDEO A thru D
CONFIGURE menu.
3
Closed Caption
Shown as CC1 – CC4, T1 – T4, or 708. Closed Caption
selections are located in the PICTURE SETUP\CLOSED
CAPTION DISPLAY menu.
4
Gamut Indication Status
Displayed when Gamut is enabled. This field is not displayed
when Gamut for the input is disabled. Select GAMUT in the
PICT pane menu to enable GAMUT.
5
Aspect Ratio
Displays the aspect ratio. The aspect ratio is determined by
the input format.
6
Picture
Displays the picture of the selected video input.
7
XDS
Displays the location of the XDS information.
8
TIMECODE
Displays the location of the timecode information.
The picture display changes according to the aspect ratio and anamorphic selections in
the global setup menu. A picture display diagram, shown as the left drawing in
Figure 3-37, shows the 4:3 display with a 16:9 source. Also, the picture to the right in
Figure 3-37 shows a 4:3 display with a 4:3 source.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-43
General Operation
Figure 3-37. Aspect Ratio Source Diagram
Picture Pane Menu Selections
Pressing and holding the PICT function button or the DISPLAY PANE button in the
active picture pane selects the pane menu. The Picture Pane menus are described in
Table 3-24 to Table 3-26 for picture monitoring.
Table 3-24. Picture Analog Menu
NATIVE
OFF
ON
DELAY
ON
OFF
DELAY POSITION
Use the H POS and V POS knobs. Press KNOB
for default.
PICTURE SETUP
Press ENT
Table 3-25. Picture SD Menu
NATIVE
OFF
ON
DELAY
ON
OFF
DELAY POSITION
Use the H POS and V POS knobs. Press KNOB
for default.
GAMUT
HIGHLIGHTING
ON
PICTURE SETUP
Press ENT
3-44
OFF
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Table 3-26. Picture HD Menu
DELAY
ON
OFF
DELAY POSITION
Use the H POS and V POS knobs. Press KNOB
for default.
GAMUT
HIGHLIGHTING
ON
PICTURE SETUP
Press ENT
OFF
Native Mode
NOTE: The Native mode menu item will only appear when an Analog or SD format is detected or
selected.
When Native mode is enabled, it displays the SD (Analog or Digital) picture as 480i.
There is no resizing in full screen in Native mode. When Native mode is not checked,
the SD picture fills the screen.
Delay
Delay is used to view the horizontal and vertical blanking areas of the video signal.
DELAY enables and disables the delay mode. Delay Position displays the amount of
vertical and horizontal delay. Using the delay position, turn the UP/DOWN and
RIGHT/LEFT knobs to position the picture. The Delay feature is not affected by the
Native mode selection.
Gamut Highlighting
When Gamut Highlighting is selected in the Picture Setup menu, a grid pattern appears
over the picture display highlighting gamut errors. Gamut Highlighting is determined
by the GAMUT THRESHOLD settings in the VIDEO ALARM DIGITAL\DIGITAL
GAMUT alarm menu.
Picture Setup
Press the ENT button to access the global Picture setup menu. For more information
on the global Picture Setup menu see Section 4.
Closed Caption
Closed Caption data can be decoded and keyed over the picture. The Closed Caption
display is provided as a means to verify that captions are present and can be decoded.
The display provides a limited character and feature set. The 708 caption service is
defined by EIA-708-B Digital Television Closed Captioning standard for High
Definition video. All other caption services are defined by EIA/CEA-608-B NTSC
Line 21 Data Services standard. The Closed Caption services are:
•
CC1 – Primary synchronous caption service (608 or 708)
•
CC2 – Special non-synchronous use captions (608)
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-45
General Operation
•
CC3 – Secondary synchronous caption service (608 or 708)
•
CC4 – Special non-synchronous use captions (608)
•
708 – Digital television caption service (HD only)
•
T1 – First text service
•
T2 – Second text service
•
T3 – Third text service
•
T4 – Fourth text service
•
XDS – Extended data services.
The default caption service is OFF. Selecting CC1 or CC3 with an EIA-708 embedded
signal will decode the derived 608 data, if present. The 608 captioning data and 708
data is extracted at the same time.
Closed captioning supports 112 characters as per EIA/CEA-608B 6.4.1:
Upper and Lower Case Characters
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
Accented Characters
àáâçèéêíîÑñóôúû
Punctuation Characters
!,.;:’”#% &@/()[]+-÷<>?°¢$£®
½¿
TM
Numeric Characters
0123456789
Other Characters
♪, standard space, □, ■
Some characters are not available such as the “e” with the dieresis above it. The
French word Noël uses this character. The ë in Noël would appear differently on the
screen. Also, Ñ is the only capital accented letter as shown above.
Timing Display
Pressing the TIMING function button accesses the Timing display for the selected
pane. A Timing display diagram is shown in Figure 3-38 and described in Table 3-27.
The diagram illustrates the general location for the various Timing display fields.
Figure 3-38. Timing Display Diagram
3-46
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Table 3-27. Description of Timing Display Diagram
Field
Identifier
Nomenclature
Field information
1
Input
Displays the user-configurable source IDs for the input and
routers.
2
Vertical scale
Displayed as V: 1Line/DIV
3
Horizontal Scale
Displayed as H: X where X is the number with µS/DIV for
analog, SD, and HD formats
4
Timing Graticules, cursors
and labels
Shows the timing graticules, cursors, and labels
5
Selected Reference
Displays the selected reference as REF: X where X is A, B,
C, D, EXT BB, EXT TRI, or LTC. The REF is selected in the
TIMING pane menu.
6
Test
Indicates the test input that is being measured against the
Selected Reference in Field Identifier 5.
7
Vertical
Displays the Vertical Error Measurement as VERT: xxx
Line(s) where xxx is the measured difference between the
reference and the test input alignment of the vertical timing
(sync/TRS) in lines.
8
HORZ (Horizontal)
Displays the Horizontal Error Measurement as
HORZ: yy.yyy uS where yy.yyy is the measured difference
between the reference and the test input alignment of the
horizontal timing (sync/TRS).
9
REF OFFSET
Displays that the zero point of the timing measurements are
offset from the REF selection by xx lines yy.yyy µs
When a signal is processed, there is the potential for it to be delayed with respect to a
reference signal. The Analog/Digital timing display is used to indicate when a video
input is deviating in time from the reference. See Reference Selection on page 3-48 for
more information on reference selection.
REF (Reference), located in the center of the timing display, indicates the
reference-timing point for the type of signal being monitored. REF is green when the
line and µsec (microseconds) cursors are all aligned. As the signal falls out of timing
alignment, the line and the µsec cursors change color when it moves from REF. When
this occurs, the REF turns red. Each hash mark represents a vertical line (top scale)
and 1µ (bottom scale). Once the line or µsec cursors are at the edge of the display,
arrows will appear to the right or left of the timing line.
NOTE: The Timing Display alignment accuracy is ±280 ns.
The bottom of the Timing display contains the following information:
•
REF – The selected reference input that represents the REF line in the Timing
display (EXT REF, INPUT A, B, C, D, LTC).
•
TEST – The selected input (A, B, C, or D) that is being monitored.
•
VERTICAL – The offset line in full-video lines between the reference and the
displayed video.
•
HORIZONTAL – The offset time in microseconds between the reference and the
displayed video. Horizontal can be yellow at 0 µsec. It displays the minimum
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-47
General Operation
scale resolution at 1µS and the minimum timing resolution at .037µS for HD (High
Definition) and 0.74µS for SD (Standard Definition).
Things to Remember When Using the Timing Display
1. The Timing Display measures the elapsed time between the vertical syncs of two
inputs. The elapsed time is expressed in units of pixels and lines of the selected
input video not of the reference.
2. When referencing a standard definition analog or digital video input to a high
definition video or external tri-level reference input, the line number indication in
the timing display represents standard definition video lines. If the relative timing
is adjusted in high definition video lines, it may take an adjustment of two or more
lines before the line number changes in the timing display. This is due to the high
frequency high definition video lines, which are shorter than the standard definition
video lines represented by the timing display.
3. When referencing a high definition video input to a standard definition analog,
digital video, or external composite (BB) reference input, the line number
indication in the timing display represents high definition video lines. If the relative
timing is adjusted in standard definition video lines, a single video line adjustment
will cause a change of two or more lines in the timing display. This is due to the
low frequency standard definition video lines, which are longer than the high
definition video lines represented by the timing display.
4. The information of the Timing Display should not be used when captured SDI
freeze data is displayed.
Timing Pane Menu Selections
Pressing and holding the TIMING function button in the active Timing pane selects the
pane menu. The Timing Pane menu is described in Table 3-28.
Table 3-28. Timing Pane Menu
REFERENCE
EXT REF
INPUT A
INPUT B
INPUT C
INPUT D
LTC
TIMING MODE
FACTORY
OFFSET
SET ZERO REF
CLEAR ZERO REF
Reference Selection
The reference selection can be selected from the TIMING pane menu. The Reference
selections are:
3-48
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
•
EXT REF – Reflects current setting of External Reference (selected by pressing
and holding the EXT button)
•
INPUT A – Internal Reference fixed on Input A.
•
INPUT B – Internal Reference fixed on Input B.
•
INPUT C – Internal Reference fixed on Input C (Option required).
•
INPUT D – Internal Reference fixed on Input D (Option required).
•
LTC – Longitudinal Time Code
Timing Mode
The Timing mode selection is used to set the offset of the reference to the signal.
When offset is applied against the reference, OFFSET is shown in the lower right
corner of the Timing Pane. REF (Reference), located in the center of the timing
display, indicates the Offset from the 0 REF point when Offset is applied. REF is
green when the line and µsec (microseconds) cursors are all aligned with the Offset
reference. As the signal falls out of timing alignment with the Offset reference, the line
and the µsec cursors change color when it moves from REF. The Timing Mode
Selections are:
•
Factory – Sets the factory reference to 0 REF. When FACTORY is selected, the
OFFSET field does not appear on the screen.
•
Offset – Enables and displays the Offset field. The reference offset is not applied
until SET ZERO REF is selected.
•
Set Zero Ref – Applies the current offset setting as the Zero REF point.
•
Clear Zero Ref – Clears the setting applied in the SET ZERO REF menu and
returns the Reference to the Factory Reference Setting. Offset remains on the
screen.
Alarm Display
Press the ALARM button to display the alarm display. Pressing and holding the
ALARM function button opens the Alarm Pane menu. The default alarm display is the
Alarm Log display. The Alarm Status pane can also be selected from the Alarm Pane
menu. For information on individual alarms, see Setting Alarms and Alarm
Descriptions in Section 5.
Alarm Log Display
The Alarm Log display lists all the alarms, the date, time, time code, duration, and
peak value. The alarm list begins with the most recent alarm and can hold a maximum
of 200 alarms.
An Alarm Log display diagram is shown in Figure 3-39 and described in Table 3-29.
The diagram illustrates the general location for the various alarm fields.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-49
General Operation
Figure 3-39. Alarm Log Diagram
Table 3-29. Description of Alarm Log Display Diagram
Field
Identifier
Field information
Nomenclature
1
Input
Displays the user-configurable source IDs for the input and
routers.
2
Display Label
Displayed as ALARM LOG
3
Page Information
Displayed as PAGE X of Y, where X is the selected page and
Y is the total number of pages.
4
Paging information
Displays ◄ = FIRST page.
5
Paging information
Displays ► = LAST page.
6
Paging information
Displays ▲ = PAGE UP.
7
Paging information
Displays ▼ = PAGE DOWN.
8
Column Labels
Displays the labels # (for the number in the alarm list),
ALARM NAME, DATE, TIME, LENGTH (Duration), and
PEAK VALUE*.
9
Alarm List
Displays the list of alarms from the most recent alarm to the
last recorded alarm. There is a maximum of 200 alarms that
can be logged.
*NOTE: Certain alarm parameters do not have a level measurement that can report a peak value. This
is indicated when NO RPV (No Report Peak Value) appears in the PEAK VALUE column. If A3-OPT2
is installed, all audio alarms will report NO RPV.
When an alarm is first registered, it appears on the alarm display and is highlighted in
yellow. If the alarm is short term (i.e., two seconds or less), the alarm text is not
highlighted after approximately two seconds. If the alarm continues longer than two
3-50
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
seconds, the text remains yellow and the alarm duration is incremented. When the next
alarm occurs, the previous alarm moves down one position.
The VTM Series has enough memory for 200 alarms per input. When 200 different
alarm events have occurred, alarm number 200 is dropped and the most recent alarm is
tagged as 01. To overcome the 200-alarm per input limit, connect a PC to the Ethernet
port and use PC support software. All alarms are passed to the PC and saved.
Use the following NAVIGATION buttons to scroll through the alarm list:
Press to page up through the alarm list.
Press to page down through the alarm list.
Press to select the first page on the list.
Press to select the last page on the list.
To erase the current group of alarms, press and hold the ENT button for approximately
five seconds.
A GPI output dry-contact closure can be used to alert other devices when an alarm
occurs. Use the COMMUNICATIONS menu to setup the GPI.
Alarm Status Display
The Alarm Status Display lists all the alarms, the state of each alarm setting, the
current alarm limit selection (if applicable), the current alarm duration (if applicable),
and the Accumulated alarm column. An alarm status display diagram is shown in
Figure 3-40 and described in Table 3-30. The diagram illustrates the general location
for the various alarm status display fields.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-51
General Operation
Figure 3-40. Alarm Status Display Diagram
Table 3-30. Description of Alarm Status Display Diagram
Field
Identifier
Nomenclature
Field information
1
Input
Displays the user-configurable source IDs for the input and
routers.
2
Display Label
Displayed as ALARM STATUS
3
Page Information
Displayed as PAGE X of Y, where X is the selected page and
Y is the total number of pages.
4
Paging information
Displays ◄ = FIRST page.
5
Paging information
Displays ► = LAST page.
6
Paging information
Displays ▲ = PAGE UP.
7
Paging information
Displays ▼ = PAGE DOWN.
8
Column Labels
Displays the columns ALARM NAME, ENABLE, LOWER
LIMIT, UPPER LIMIT, THRESHOLD/CES, DURATION, and
TOTAL ALARMS.
The alarm status screen contains alarm name text that can appear in a colored state.
The colored states are:
•
White: indicates alarm is not enabled.
•
Green: indicates alarm is enabled and not exceeding alarm limits.
•
Red: indicates the alarm is enabled and exceeding an alarm limits.
There is a two second persistence for any Alarm Name color change.
Use the following NAVIGATION buttons to scroll through the alarm list:
3-52
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Press to page up through the alarm list.
Press to page down through the alarm list.
Press to select the first page on the list.
Press to select the last page on the list.
Alarm Log and Status Pane Menu Selections
Pressing and holding the ALARM function button in the alarm status pane selects the
Alarm pane menu. The Alarm pane menu is described in Table 3-7.
Table 3-31. Alarm Status Pane Menu
DISPLAY
ALARM LOG
ALARM STATUS
ALARM LOG DISPLAY
ALL
VIDEO ALARMS
AUDIO ALARMS
TIME CODE
ALARMS
GPI ALARMS
MUTE ALARMS
OFF
ON
VIDEO ALARMS
ANALOG
Press ENT
VIDEO ALARMS
DIGITAL
Press ENT
AUDIO ALARMS
Press ENT
Display
The Display menu selection is used to select between the Alarm Log and Alarm Status
displays.
The Alarm Status screen lists all the alarms, the state of each alarm setting, the current
alarm limit selection (if applicable), and the current alarm duration (if applicable).
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-53
General Operation
Alarm Log Display
The Alarm Log Display menu determines the type of information that is displayed in
the alarm log screen. The selections are:
•
All
•
Video Alarms
•
Audio Alarms
•
Time Code Alarms
•
GPI Alarms
Mute Alarms
Sound occurs when an alarm is activated and SOUND is selected for the alarm in the
Alarm Matrix. The Alarm Matrix is accessed in any of the Alarm Setup menus. The
mute alarms submenu is used to enable or disable the alarm notification sound.
Video Alarm Analog
Press the ENT button to access the global VIDEO ALARMS, ANALOG menu. For
more information on the global SETUP menu see Section 4.
Video Alarm Digital
Press the ENT button to access the global VIDEO ALARMS, DIGITAL menu. For
more information on the global SETUP menu see Section 4.
Audio Alarms
Press the ENT button to access the global AUDIO ALARMS menu. For more
information on the global SETUP menu see Section 4.
Audio Display
Press the AUDIO button to display the audio display. Only one audio pane can be
displayed at a time. The VTM Series accepts up to 8 AES/EBU, 8 analog, and four
groups of embedded inputs, and provides up to 8 analog and 4 AES/EBU output
channels. Dolby D and Dolby E inputs are also available on selected options.
Five audio types are selected by pressing the SETUP button and selecting AUDIO
SETUP\CONFIGURE INPUT A thru D\AUDIO TYPE menu:
•
ANALOG
•
AES/EBU - A digital audio standard established jointly by the Audio Engineering
Society (AES) and the European Broadcasting Union (EBU).
•
EMBEDDED - Digital audio information multiplexed onto a serial digital data
stream. Up to sixteen channels can be multiplexed on a single stream of 601 video,
minimizing cabling and routing requirement.
•
DOLBY AES - Dolby encoded audio information from a digital audio input.
(Dolby option required)
3-54
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
•
DOLBY EMB. (EMBEDDED) - Dolby Encoded audio information multiplexed
onto a serial digital data stream. (Dolby option required)
Configure the audio display type and parameters using the Audio Setup CONFIGURE
INPUT A thru D submenu. Audio can be displayed as:
•
One 2 channel bar graph with 1 Lissajous and 1 Phase bar
•
Two 2 channel bar graphs (for a total of 4 channels) with 2 Lissajous and 2 Phase
bars
•
Three 2 channel bar graphs (for a total of 6 channels) with 3 Phase bars or
CineSound 5.1 with 2 Phase bars
•
Four 2 channel bar graphs (for a total of 8 channels) with 4 Phase bars or
CineSound 5.1+AUX, 6.1, or 7.1 with up to three phase bars.
Lissajous can be selected as Soundstage or X-Y displays.
Input assignments, scaling, input levels, and response can also be modified using the
Audio Setup menu. The function of the audio is dependent upon the audio option
installed.
Audio Scales
The Vertical audio graticule scales change according to the scale selections made in the
AUDIO SETUP\METER SETUP\ANALOG or DIGITAL SCALE menu and the
format being displayed.
The Scales are:
•
TYPE I
•
Type IIA
•
Type IIB
•
Type I + 8
•
Nordic
•
DIN 45406
•
dBFS (Digital only)
•
Zero dB Ref dBFS (ref –20 dBFS) (Digital only)
•
Custom dBFS (Digital only)
•
Custom dB
Vertical Audio Displays
The Vertical Meter displays the level, reference, and ballistics detail in a vertical
format. There are eight analog audio input channels (four stereo pairs), 8 AES/EBU
digital input channels (eight stereo pairs), and 16 embedded audio channels
(serial-digital video input only) available for selection in the menu. A maximum of
eight channels can be displayed simultaneously. Audio inputs can be assigned to any
meter on the display.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-55
General Operation
The displayed inputs can also be monitored as analog signals on the 37-pin, D-Sub,
ANALOG IN/OUT connector. The displayed AES/EBU or embedded audio will be
converted to analog audio for the monitoring output. The output audio level can be
adjusted from -50 dB to +6 dB around the reference-input level. The default output
level for a -20 dBFS input produces a +4 dBm analog output level (600Ω). For
example, when applying a gain adjustment of +6 dB to the output with a -20 dBFS
input signal, the audio output level will be +10 dBm into a 600Ω termination. This
Audio Output Level adjustment is made in the AUDIO SETUP\OUTPUT
PREFERENCES menu. The Audio Output Level adjustment default is 0 dB.
The phase bars are used to monitor the instantaneous phase relationship between two
channels of audio. The “+” marking indicates a phase difference of 0°, and the “-”
marking indicates a phase difference of 180°. A properly phased stereo pair produces a
phase pointer that moves within the green zone, whereas a reversed channel produces a
pointer that moves within the red zone. The phase bar polarity in the AUDIO
SETUP\METER SETUP\CONFIGURE PHASE BARS\POLARITY menu can be set
to Normal or Reverse.
The effect of higher damping in a phase meter is to show an averaged rather than a
peak value of phase. The Phase Bar Damping in the AUDIO SETUP\METER
SETUP\CONFIGURE PHASE BARS\DAMPING can be set from FAST, 1 to 10, and
SLOW.
The lissajous display appears for 2 and 4 bar graphs on the right of the audio pane. The
lissajous display shows the amplitude and phase relationship between two input
signals.
Vertical Audio display diagrams are shown in Figure 3-41 to Figure 3-44 and
described in Table 3-32 to Table 3-35. The Vertical audio graticule scales change
according to the scale selections made in the Setup menu and the format being
displayed. Some of the markings in the illustrations do not appear on the display.
Figure 3-41. Two Bar Graph Display with Lissajous Diagram
3-56
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Table 3-32. Description of Two Bar Graph Display with Lissajous Diagram
Field
Identifier
Nomenclature
Field information
1
Input
Displays the user-configurable source IDs for the input and
routers.
2
Audio Type
Displayed as Analog, AES, Embedded, Dolby AES, Dolby
Embedded.
3
Audio Input
The displayed information is option dependent. Shown as 1
to 16 (analog is 1 to 8, AES is 1 to 16 or 1 to 8, and
Embedded is 1 to 16).
4
Meter Response
Displays the selected meter response: VU, Peak, True Peak,
VU + Peak, VU + True Peak, Loudness, Custom
5
Scale Selection
Displays the selected meter scale: Type I, Type IIa, Type IIb,
Type I + 8, Nordic, DIN 45406, dBFS, Zero REF dBFS,
Custom dB, and Custom dBFS (scales are dependent upon
audio type).
6
Lissajous Display
Lissajous of bar graph 1 with labels for R, L, and the number
of the meter being monitored (i.e. M-1)
7
Phase Bar
Phase Meter of bar graph 1
8
Audio Graticule (with
meter labels)
Shown as Stereo Pairs (L1, R1), SMPTE 320M, or Custom
label.
9
Zoom
Zoom (when enabled)
Blank when disabled
Press the ZOOM button to cycle through the Zoom
modes
10
Level Markers
Shows the peak and reference levels for the signal. This can
be adjusted in the AUDIO SETUP\METER SETUP\REF
DIGITAL (or ANALOG) menu.
Figure 3-42. Four Bar Graph with Lissajous Display Diagram
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-57
General Operation
Table 3-33. Description of Four Bar Graph with Lissajous Display Diagram
Field
Identifier
Field information
Nomenclature
1
Input
Displays the user-configurable source IDs for the input and
routers.
2
Audio Type
Displayed as Analog, AES, Embedded, Dolby AES, Dolby
Embedded.
3
Audio Input
The displayed information is option dependent. Shown as 1
to 16 (analog is 1 to 8, AES is 1 to 16 or 1 to 8, and
Embedded is 1 to 16).
4
Meter Response
Displays the selected meter response: VU, Peak, True Peak,
VU + Peak, VU + True Peak, Loudness, Custom
5
Scale Selection
Displays the selected meter scale: Type I, Type IIa, Type IIb,
Type I + 8, Nordic, DIN 45406, dBFS, Zero REF dBFS
(scales dependent upon audio type).
6
Lissajous Display (1)
Lissajous of bar graph 1 with labels for R, L, and the number
of the meter being monitored (i.e. M-1)
7
Phase Bar (1)
Phase Meter of bar graph 1
8
Lissajous Display (2)
Lissajous of bar graph 1 with labels for R, L, and the number
of the meter being monitored (i.e. M-2)
9
Phase Bar (2)
Phase Meter of bar graph 2
10
Audio Graticule (with
meter labels)
Shown as L1, R1, L2, and R2 (or Custom label).
11
Zoom
Zoom (when enabled)
Blank when disabled
Press the ZOOM button to cycle through the Zoom
modes
12
3-58
Level Markers
Shows the peak and reference levels for the signal. This can
be adjusted in the AUDIO SETUP\METER SETUP\REF
DIGITAL (or ANALOG) menu.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Figure 3-43. Six Bar Graph Diagram
Table 3-34. Description of Six Bar Graph Diagram
Field
Identifier
Field information
Nomenclature
1
Input
Displays the user-configurable source IDs for the input and
routers.
2
Audio Type
Displayed as Analog, AES, Embedded, Dolby AES, Dolby
Embedded.
3
Audio Input
The displayed information is option dependent. Shown as 1
to 16 (analog is 1 to 8, AES is 1 to 16 or 1 to 8, and
Embedded is 1 to 16).
4
Meter Response
Displays the selected meter response: VU, Peak, True Peak,
VU + Peak, VU + True Peak, Custom, Loudness
5
Scale Selection
Displays the selected meter scale: Type I, Type IIa, Type IIb,
Type I + 8, Nordic, DIN 45406, dBFS, Zero REF dBFs.
6
Phase Bar (1)
Phase Meter of bar graph 1
7
Phase Bar (2)
Phase Meter of bar graph 2
8
Phase Bar (3)
Phase Meter of bar graph 3
9
Audio Graticule (with
meter labels)
Shown as L1, R1, L2, R2, L3, and R3 (or Custom label).
10
Zoom
Zoom (when enabled)
Blank when disabled
Press the ZOOM button to cycle through the Zoom
modes
11
Level Markers
Shows the peak and reference levels for the signal. This can
be adjusted in the AUDIO SETUP\METER SETUP\REF
DIGITAL (or ANALOG) menu.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-59
General Operation
Figure 3-44. Eight Bar Graph Display Diagram
Table 3-35. Description of Eight Bar Graph Display Diagram
Field
Identifier
Field information
Nomenclature
1
Input
Displays the user-configurable source IDs for the input and
routers.
2
Audio Type
Displayed as Analog, AES, Embedded, Dolby AES, Dolby
Embedded.
3
Audio Input
The displayed information is option dependent. Shown as 1
to 16 (analog is 1 to 8, AES is 1 to 16 or 1 to 8, and
Embedded is 1 to 16).
4
Meter Response
Displays the selected meter response: VU, Peak, True Peak,
VU + Peak, VU + True Peak, Loudness, Custom
5
Scale Selection
Displays the selected meter scale: Type I, Type IIa, Type IIb,
Type I + 8, Nordic, DIN 45406, dBFS, Zero REF dBFs.
6
Phase Bar (1)
Phase Meter of bar graph 1
7
Phase Bar (2)
Phase Meter of bar graph 2
8
Phase Bar (3)
Phase Meter of bar graph 3
9
Phase Bar (4)
Phase Meter of bar graph 4
10
Audio Graticule (with
meter labels)
Shown as L1, R1, L2, R2, L3, and R3 (or Custom label).
11
Zoom
Zoom (when enabled)
Blank when disabled
Press the ZOOM button to cycle through the Zoom
modes
12
3-60
Level Meters
Shows the peak and reference levels for the signal. This can
be adjusted in the AUDIO SETUP\METER SETUP\REF
DIGITAL (or ANALOG) menu.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
CineSound Display
This unique, audio display provides an intuitive view of 5.1, 6.1, and 7.1 channels of
surround sound audio. The default meter movement is from the center outward, but it
can be reversed by a selection in the AUDIO SETUP menu. Two additional channels
of audio can be viewed next to the CineSound® display, if required, thereby providing
a total of eight channels on the screen. When the CineSound® display is selected, the
audio inputs and meter labels follow a SMPTE 320M mapping scheme as listed in
Table 3-36.
Table 3-36. CineSound® Audio Input Mapping
Analog
Input
AES/EBU
Input
CineSound Display Assignment
1
1
Left
1 Left (L1)
2
1
Right
1 Right (R1)
3
2
Center
2 Left (L2)
4
2
Low Frequency Effects (LFE)
2 Right (R2)
5
3
Left Surround (LS)
3 Left (L3)
6
3
Right Surround (RS)
3 Right (R3)
7
4
Left Aux
4 Left (L4)
8
4
Right Aux
4 Right (R4)
8-Bar Display Assignment
The 5.1 CineSound Audio display diagram is illustrated in Figure 3-45 and described
in Table 3-37. Figure 3-46 displays CineSound with 6.1 Channels. Figure 3-47
displays CineSound with 7.1 Channels.
Figure 3-45. CineSound 5.1 Display Diagram
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-61
General Operation
Table 3-37. Description of CineSound Display Diagram
Field
Identifier
Nomenclature
Field information
1
Input
Displays the user-configurable source IDs for the input and
routers.
2
Audio Type
Displayed as Analog, AES, Embedded, Dolby AES, Dolby
Embedded.
3
Audio Input
The displayed information is option dependent. Shown as 1
to 16 (analog is 1 to 8, AES is 1 to 16 or 1 to 8, and
Embedded is 1 to 16).
4
Meter Response
Displays the selected meter response: VU (normal), Peak,
True Peak, VU + Peak, VU + True Peak, Loudness, Custom
5
Scale Selection
Displays the selected meter scale: Type I, Type IIa, Type IIb,
Type I + 8, Nordic, DIN 45406, dBFS, Zero REF dBFS.
6
Phase Meter of Surround
LR
Displays the Surround LR Phase
7
Phase Meter of Front LR
Displays the Front LR Phase
8
Phase Meter of AUX
Displays the AUX Phase
9
Audio Graticule (with
meter labels)
Shown as LFE, Ls, Left, Center, Right, Rs, and AUX L, R (or
Custom label). These are the default labels.
10
Zoom
Zoom (when enabled)
Blank when disabled
Press the ZOOM button to cycle through the Zoom
modes
11
Level Meters
Shows the peak and reference levels for the signal. This can
be adjusted in the AUDIO SETUP\METER SETUP\REF
DIGITAL (or ANALOG) menu.
Figure 3-46. CineSound 6.1 Channels Display
3-62
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Figure 3-47. CineSound 7.1 Channels Display
Expanding the Audio Display
Press the ZOOM button to access the audio zoom feature. The range of the
zoom is dependent upon the selections made in the ZOOM CENTER and
ZOOM RANGE menu. Press and hold ZOOM to access this menu.
•
ZOOM CENTER: Adjustable from +0 dB to –50 dB in 1 dB steps. The default is
the REFERENCE LEVEL setting. The ZOOM CENTER adjustment is restricted
by AUDIO SCALE, REFERENCE LEVEL, and ZOOM RANGE selections.
•
ZOOM RANGE: Adjustable from 4 dB to 20 dB in 2 dB steps. The default is
10 dB. The ZOOM RANGE adjustment is restricted by AUDIO SCALE,
REFERENCE LEVEL, and ZOOM CENTER selections. Zoom must be enabled to
view the new adjustments.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-63
General Operation
Audio Menu Selections
Pressing and holding the AUDIO function button in the active audio pane selects the
audio pane menu. The Audio Pane menu is described in Table 3-38.
Table 3-38. Audio Pane Menu
AUDIO INPUT CHECK
OFF
ANALOG
AES 1 – 4
AES 5 – 8
EMBEDDED 1 - 8
EMBEDDED 9 - 16
LISSAJOUS
SOUNDSTAGE
X–Y
AUDIO SETUP
Press ENT
Audio Input Check
The Audio Input Check is a quick way of checking the audio sources. It displays and
changes 8-CH bargraphs with the input source selected from the pane menus. It
overrides input selections and is only active while it is enabled.
Lissajous
Select to determine the type of Lissajous display that appears in the Audio pane. There
are two type of Lissajous displays (Soundstage and X-Y). The soundstage selection
displays a lissajous, which is rotated so that the in-phase signals appear on the vertical
axis and out of phase signals appear on the horizontal axis.
X-Y displays a lissajous with the left channel mapped to the vertical axis, and the right
channel mapped to the horizontal axis.
Audio Setup
Press the ENT button to access the global Audio Setup menu. For more information on
the Audio, see the A3-OPT 3, A3-OPT 4, A3-OPT 5, and A3-4004 Installation and
Operation Handbook.
Option Display
NOTE: Only one option display can be shown at a time.
Pressing the OPTION function button accesses the Optional display for the
selected pane. To select the type of optional display for the pane, press and
hold the OPT button to access the OPTION pane menu. The Option Pane menu is
described in Table 3-39.
3-64
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Table 3-39. Option Pane Menu
DISPLAY
DOLBY METADATA (only if the Dolby
option is installed).
VIDEO METADATA
XDS
TELETEXT
CRC
ASI
EMBEDDED AUDIO DATA
SETUP
Press ENT
Display
The display that appears for the selected input is determined by the DISPLAY
submenu of the OPTION Pane setup menu. The displays that are selectable are:
•
Dolby Metadata (described on page 3-65)
•
Video Metadata (described on page 3-67)
•
XDS (described on page 3-69)
•
Teletext (described on page 3-70)
•
CRC (described on page 3-71)
•
ASI (described on page 3-73)
•
Embedded Audio Data (described on page 3-77)
Option Setup
Press the ENT button to access the global setup menu. For more information on the
global Setup menu see Section 4.
Dolby Metadata Display (Option Dependent)
Metadata is Dolby specific information found in the input audio stream that is used to
configure encoders that will transmit the Dolby Digital (AC-3) information to audio
decoders.
When the metadata information appears on the display, use the UP and
DOWN NAVIGATION buttons to page through the metadata list. Press
the RIGHT NAVIGATION button to move to the next program list.
Press the LEFT NAVIGATION button to move to the previous program
list. The metadata is read from the Dolby stream and cannot be
changed.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-65
General Operation
1. Time Stamp
18. Lo/Ro Surround Downmix
2. Program Config
19. Lo/Ro Center Downmix
3. Program
20. Pref. Stereo Downmix
4. Data Rate
21. Dolby Surr (Surround) Ex. Mode
5. Bitstream Mode
22. A/D Converter Type
6. Channel Mode
23. Original Bitstream
7. LFE Channel (Enabled/Disabled)
24. Copyright Bit
8. Dolby Surr (Surround) Mode
25. DC Filter
9. Dialogue Level
26. Lowpass Filter
10. Center Downmix Level
27. LFE Lowpass Filter
11. Surround Downmix Level
28. Surround Attenuation
12. Audio Prod (Production)
Information
29. Surround Phase Shift
13. Room Type
30. Line Mode Comp Gain
14. Mix Level
31. Dynamic Range Gain
15. RF Overmod Protection
32. RF Mode Comp Gain
16. Lt/Rt Surround Downmix
33. Compression Gain
17. Lt/Rt Center Downmix
A Dolby Metadata display diagram is shown in Figure 3-48 and described in
Table 3-40. The diagram illustrates the general location for the various waveform
display fields.
Figure 3-48. Dolby Metadata Display Diagram
3-66
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Table 3-40. Description of Dolby Metadata Display Diagram
Field
Identifier
Field information
Nomenclature
1
Input
Displays the user-configurable source IDs for the input and
routers.
2
Display Label
Shown as Dolby Metadata
3
Page Information
Shown as page X of Y where X is the page number and Y is
the total number of pages.
4
Paging Information
Displays ◄ = Previous program.
5
Paging Information
Displays ► = Next program
6
Paging Information
Displays ▲ = PAGE UP.
7
Paging Information
Displays ▼ = PAGE DOWN.
8
Date, Internal Time,
Selected Time Code, time
stamp
Date is shown as month/day/year, internal Time is shown as
hour: minute: seconds, and time code is shown as hour:
minute: seconds: frame.
9
Metadata Information
3
3
Supplied by the A -OPT 5 board. The A -OPT 4 shows some
metadata programs, but not all.
10
Audio Type
Displayed as Analog, AES, or Embedded, Dolby AES, Dolby
Embedded
11
Dolby Display INPUT
The input selected in the AUDIO SETUP\CONFIGURE
INPUT (A thru D)\DOLBY SETUP\DISPLAY INPUT menu is
the Dolby display input displayed. Dolby inputs are shown as
one digital input.
12
Program Information
Shows how many programs are available for the current
Dolby format, and to which program the metadata
parameters apply.
Video Metadata
The Video metadata display provides a description and location in text form of specific
data embedded in the video signal. A Video Metadata display diagram is shown in
Figure 3-49 and described in Table 3-41. The diagram illustrates the general location
for the various Video Metadata display fields.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-67
General Operation
Figure 3-49. Video Metadata Display Diagram
Table 3-41. Description of the Video Metadata Display Diagram
Field
Identifier
Field information
Nomenclature
1
Input
Displays the user-configurable source IDs for the input and
routers.
2
Display Label
Displayed as Video Metadata
3
Page Information
Shown as page X of Y where X is the page number and Y is
the total number of pages.
4
Paging Information
Displays ▲ = PAGE UP.
5
Paging Information
Displays ▼ = PAGE DOWN.
6
Data Column Label
Indicates the DATA column.
7
Present Column Label
Indicates the data detected.
8
Location/Info Column
Label
Indicates the location information from the appropriate
specification when it is detected.
9
Metadata Information
Displays the video metadata information.
The display, shown in Figure 3-49, shows a chart that is split into three columns,
which shows the information to be identified.
•
The DATA COLUMN lists the Video metadata parameter.
•
The PRESENT column has two states: No data detected (blank box) and Data
Detected (indicated as present).
•
The LOCATION/INFO column displays the location information from the
appropriate specification when it is detected.
3-68
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Table 3-42. Sample Video Metadata Pane List
DATA
PRESENT
LOCATION/INFO
10/8 BIT VIDEO
Present
10—bit
CC-1 (608)
Present
LINE 21
Present
LINE 21
Present
LINE 23
CC-2 (608)
CC-3 (608)
CC-4 (608)
T-1 (608)
T-2 (608)
T-3 (608)
T-4 (608)
XDS (608)
DTVCC (708)
DVB TELETEXT
DVB SUBTITLES
WSS
V CHIP
VITC
AUDIO PRESENCE EMBEDDED
1, 2, 3, 4
The second page consists of Video Indexing information for Class 1 (title only), as
shown in Table 3-43.
Table 3-43. Sample Video Index Pane
DATA
LOCATION/INFO
VIDEO INDEX CLASS 1
STANDARD/ASPECT RATIO
625/50 4x3
GAMUT
RGB
SAMPLING
4:0:0
PAN
PIXELS: -305.0000
TILT
LINES: -281.75
ZOOM
LINES: +563.5
XDS
Extended Data Services (XDS) is a data service that provides current and future
program information (such as the program name, type, and content advisory
information). It also provides other related information (such as a national weather
service message and time zone information).
Press the NAVIGATION buttons to scroll through the available pages. Only the
information that is available in the video stream will appear next to the XDS field. If
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-69
General Operation
the information is not available in the data stream, the displayed information following
the title is blank.
Deactivate the XDS pane by making another selection using the OPTION pop-up
menu, or pressing a different function button in the selected pane. A sample XDS pane
is shown in Figure 3-50.
Figure 3-50. XDS pane
Teletext
NOTE: If the format selected is not a valid format for teletext, NOT VALID DISPLAY FOR INPUT
FORMAT appears on the screen. PAL and 625 are the only formats that functions with teletext.
Teletext functionality is operational when enabled in the OPTION DISPLAY pane
menu. When enabled, the VTM monitors for teletext.
The Teletext Detect alarm is activated when the presence of Teletext is not detected in
the vertical blanking interval for some time in excess of the duration setting. The
Teletext Not Updating alarm is also activated when the Teletext carrier is present and
the data word is null for a period in excess of the duration setting. Press the DOWN
arrow to go to the Index page (page 100). Press the LEFT ARROW button to go to the
previous page, and press the RIGHT ARROW button to go to the next page.
Press the ENT button to open the Teletext Page Input screen. From this screen, select
the page where the teletext can be viewed. Use the UP/DOWN Navigation buttons to
change the number for the page. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button to move between
numeric positions.
3-70
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
CRC
CRC evaluates SD and HD formats. CRC functionality is operational when enabled in
the OPTION DISPLAY pane menu. When enabled and the OPTION button is pressed,
the CRC display appears.
A CRC display diagram is shown in Figure 3-51 and described in Table 3-44. The
diagram illustrates the general location for the various CRC display fields.
Figure 3-51. CRC Display Diagram
Table 3-44. Description of the CRC Display Diagram
Field
Identifier
Field information
Nomenclature
1
Input
Displays the user-configurable source IDs for the input and
routers.
2
Display Label
Displayed as CRC DISPLAY
3
Standard
Displayed as the line rate/frame rate [1080i/59.94]. When no
signal is present, No Signal appears.
4
Reset Information
Reset information, Press ENT to reset is displayed.
5
CRC timer, information
and errors
Lists the CRC information.
The following information is displayed when the CRC display is ON and an SD format
is detected:
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-71
General Operation
DISPLAY
Time since Reset
DESCRIPTION
00:00:00
Hr:min:sec, elapsed time since last reset
FF
CRC
Seconds
Value
Full field CRC error in seconds
AP
CRC
Seconds
Value
Active Picture CRC error in seconds
F1
AP
CRC
Value
CRC value (Check Sum) for active
picture, field one
F2
AP
CRC
Value
CRC value (Check Sum) for active
picture, field two
Embedded Audio
Value
Detects how many groups of audio are
available
Ancillary Data
Present
Detects other ancillary information
Format Errors
Detects a format error
NOTE: When activated, the CRC display replaces the alarm display when an SD format is detected.
The following information is displayed when the CRC display is ON and an HD format
is detected:
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Time since Reset
CRC
Error Free
00:00:00
Seconds
Value
Hr:min:sec, elapsed time since last reset
Length of time in seconds CRC is error free
CHROMA
-
Embedded Audio
Value
Detects how many groups of audio are
available
Ancillary Data
Present
Detects other ancillary Chroma information
LUMA
Ancillary Data
Present
Format Errors
Y*
Detects ancillary Luma information
C*
Detects a format error
*NOTE: Y=Luma and C=Chroma
The CRC Window Format Error types are displayed under FORMAT ERRORS when
they are detected. The CRC format error types are:
•
SAV PLACED INCORRECTLY (SAV)
•
LINE LENGTH ERROR (Line Length)
•
FIELD LENGTH ERROR (Field Length)
•
RESERVED VALUES USED IMPROPERLY (Reserved Values)
•
ANC DATA CHECKSUM ERROR (ANC Checksum)
•
ANC DATA PARITY ERROR (ANC Parity)
•
ANC DATA PLACEMENT ERROR (ANC Placement)
•
ABSENCE OF SERIAL VIDEO INPUT (No Video)
Press and hold the ENT button on the front panel to reset the CRC elapsed time to zero
and clear the EDH errors. The CRC error types are described in Section 5.
3-72
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
ASI (Option VTM-OPT ASI only)
The ASI screen is used to analyze the transport stream that complies with the ATSC or
DVB standard. It utilizes text and graphical formats and trending for up to six
selectable programs simultaneously. It accepts two independent MPEG streams and
analyzes the selected stream in real-time for compliance to measurement guidelines of
ETSI TR-101-290 (ETR-290) first, second, and third priority standards. The priority
standards are:
•
ETR 290 1st Priority
•
ETR 290 2nd Priority (DVB)
•
ETR 290 2nd Priority (ATSC)
•
ETR 290 3rd Priority (DVB)
•
ETR 290 3rd Priority (ATSC)
Two formats that can be monitored in the MPEG stream are DVB and ATSC. Digital
Video Broadcasting (DVB) is a specific project office of the European Broadcast
Union. This group has produced a set of digital broadcasting standards. The
Advanced Television Systems Committee (ATSC) is the parent organization that
developed, tested, and described the form and function of the US digital television
formats. DVB ASI and SMPTE310 are automatically detected and not manually
selected.
To select the ATSC or DVB format:
1. Press and hold the ENT button. The T.S. FORMAT menu appears.
2. Select the ATSC or DVB format in the T.S. FORMAT menu.
The ASI screen, shown in Figure 3-52, displays the selected program information for
the MPEG stream. The information is displayed based on the table selected. The other
selection to show information is BW (bandwidth).
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-73
General Operation
Figure 3-52. ASI Display Diagram (ATSC Standard Selected)
Navigate the screen using the left, right, up, and down navigation buttons. Press the
LEFT and RIGHT navigation buttons to select the available video programs in the
stream. Information related to the programs appears as soon as the program is selected.
Press the UP and DOWN navigation buttons or turn the CURVED ARROW knob to
scroll through the available tables. The tables are determined by the ATSC or DVB
formats. If a program is removed from the transport stream, the associated program
indication turns red and “NO PROGRAM” appears.
If ATSC is the format for the stream, the tables that appear are:
•
INFO (from the Program and System Information Protocol (PSIP))
•
PAT (Program Association Table) - The PAT tells the decoder how many
programs are in a stream and points to the Program Map Tables (PMTs) that
contain the information where the parts for any given event can be found.
•
PMT (Program Map Table) - The PMT points to the component video, audio, and
data streams that make up the program. Parts in this context are the video stream
(normally one), the audio streams, and the data streams.
•
MGT (Master Guide Table) – The MGT defines the type, packet identifiers, and
PSIP tables in the transport stream. Only the System Time Table (STT) is not
defined in the MGT tables. Press ENT and the UP and DOWN navigation buttons
to scroll through the tables.
•
VCT (Virtual Channel Table) – The VCT tabulates virtual channel attributes for
tuning.
•
RRT (Region Rating Table) – The RRT indicates the ratings for various countries
•
STT (System Time Table) – The SST indicates the time
3-74
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
•
EIT (Event Information Table) – lists the programs and information for the virtual
channels. The information includes, name, start time, and duration. Press ENT and
the UP and DOWN navigation buttons to scroll through the programs.
•
EPG (Electronic Program Guide) – The EPG indicates a list of the programs and
the times the programs occur. Press ENT and the UP and DOWN navigation
buttons to scroll through the programs.
•
BW (Bandwidth) – The BW screen displays the trend data, total bandwidth, and
bandwidth per program.
If DVB is the format for the stream, the tables that appear are:
•
INFO (from the Service Information Table (SI))
•
PAT (Program Association Table) - The PAT tells the decoder how many
programs are in a stream and points to the Program Map Tables (PMTs) that
contain the information where the parts for any given event can be found.
•
PMT (Program Map Table) - The PMT points to the component video, audio, and
data streams that make up the program. Parts in this context are the video stream
(normally one), the audio streams, and the data streams.
•
EIT (Event Information Table) - lists the programs for the virtual channels. Press
ENT and the UP and DOWN navigation buttons to scroll through the programs.
•
CAT (Conditional Access Table) - The Condition Access Table (CAT) is the
pointer to enable the Integrated Receiver Decoder (IRD) to find the Entitlement
Management Message (EMM) associated with the CA system(s) that it uses.
•
NIT (Network Information Table) – the NIT contains the information for the
transmissions of a stream in a network. Each stream is individually identified with
a network ID and a transport stream ID.
•
SDT (Service Description Table) – The SDT describes services found within a
transport stream. Press ENT and the UP and DOWN navigation buttons to scroll
through the services.
•
BW (Bandwidth) – The BW screen displays the trend data, total bandwidth, and
bandwidth per program.
Bandwidth and Trending Screen
The Bandwidth screen, shown in Figure 3-53, indicates the trend data, total bandwidth,
and the bandwidth per program. The top of the display is a bar graph. The far right of
the bar graph indicates the total bandwidth. The bars to the left of the total bandwidth
bar indicate the bandwidth per program.
Beneath the bar graph is a plotted chart (trending chart) that displays the bandwidth
level in mb/s over the selected time. The trending chart is displayed with the selectable
bandwidth level on the left and the selectable time on the bottom of the chart. The
trending chart can display the Total bandwidth over time, the selected program, or
NULL bandwidth. Samples are plotted in 15, 30, 45, or 60-minute intervals.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-75
General Operation
Figure 3-53. ASI Bandwidth Display
ASI Menu Selections
Pressing and holding the ENT button in the active ASI pane selects the ASI pane
menu. The ASI Pane menu is described in Table 3-45.
Table 3-45. ASI Pane Menu
T.S. FORMAT
ATSC
DVB
DATA FORMAT
HEX
DECIMAL
UTC OFFSET
-12.00 TO +12.00 (0.00 is
Default) HOURS
TREND TIME
15 MINUTES
30 MINUTES
45 MINUTES
60 MINUTES
TREND SCALE
10 mb/s TO 150 mb/s
TREND DISPLAY
TOTAL
FOLLOW PGM SELECT
NULL BANDWIDTH
T.S. Format
The Transport Stream Format menu is used to determine the format that complies with
the MPEG stream. The format selections are ATSC and DVB.
3-76
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Data Format
The Data Format menu is used to determine the numeric base for the Transport Stream
information that is displayed: Hex or Decimal
UTC Offset
The Universal Time Coordinator (UTC) is used to provide an offset of the time shown
on the display to the time that the program is to actually begin. This is useful for
programs shown in a different time zone to the time zone of the unit. The UTC Offset
parameters are in hour increments.
Trend Time
The X-axis of the trending chart contains the selected trending time. When new data is
entered into the trending display, the time interval on the X-axis changes while the plot
lines shift from right to left. The TRENDING TIME is set in 15, 30, 45, or 60MINUTE increments:
Trend Scale
The Y-axis of the trending chart is used to indicate the scale that is plotted on the
trending chart. Bandwidth data is plotted on a scale of 10 mb/s to 150 mb/s.
Trend Display
The Trend Display menu item is used to select the type of information that is shown in
the trending display. The selections are the Total Bandwidth, the bandwidth of the
selected program, and Null Bandwidth. The Null Bandwidth is the bandwidth that is
used by the Null packet.
Embedded Audio Data
When enabled in the OPTION pop-up menu, the Embedded Audio display appears.
Each channel is displayed on two pages. The first page is CHANNEL STATUS BIT
and the second page is USER BIT. Audio Control Packet data provides the first block
of information at the top of the pane. The information is embedded at line 9 or 571
(interlaced only) of the horizontal ancillary data for the Y channel.
At the top of the pane DID indicates the audio groups that are embedded as audio, and
a “-”indicates the audio group is not present. Also, the channel number for the data
displayed is shown.
The remaining Embedded Audio information provided in the Embedded Audio pane
are:
•
CHANNELS PRESENT indicates all of the active channels by showing the
channel number. When the channel is not present, a “-” appears.
•
SAMPLING RATE indicates the sampling frequency of the embedded audio.
•
FORMAT indicates the professional or consumer audio format.
•
AUDIO DATA indicates if the data received is audio (shown with YES) or not
audio (shown with NO).
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-77
General Operation
•
EMPHASIS indicates No, NA, TC, and J17. No indicates no emphasis. NA
indicates that there is no data available or defined. TC indicates the time constant
of 50/15 uS. J17 indicates CCITT J.17 (800 HZ insertion loss of 6.5 dB).
•
SIGNAL LOCK indicates a lock of the source sampling frequency.
•
CHANNEL MODE indicates NA, two channel, 1 channel, primary/secondary, and
Stereo. NA indicates that the data value is not available or reserved.
•
RESOLUTION indicates 20 or 24 bit audio packets.
•
The CHANNEL STATUS BIT/USER BIT shows all 192 bits of information by
byte. Channel status bit/User Bit information analyzes the bits, decodes the
information, and displays the selected data.
When the Embedded Audio data information appears on the display, use
the UP and DOWN NAVIGATION buttons to scroll through the audio
data. Press the RIGHT NAVIGATION button to select the next
channel. Press the LEFT NAVIGATION button to select the previous
channel.
Multi-Screen Display Selection
Press the MLT button in the display group to toggle between the MLT and
Quad or Full Screen. MLT is high tally when selected. Press and hold the
MLT button to access the MLT DISPLAY menu where one of the following
can be selected:
•
VTM CLASSIC: Enables the display to be setup like a classic VTM display, as
described on page 3-78.
•
DATA ANALYZER: Enables the Data Analyzer display, as described on page
3-81. This menu item is not accessible without the TVM-OPT AAP option.
•
TIMING CUSTOM: Enables the Custom Timing Display, as described on page
3-85.
•
WFM/VEC ONLY: Enables the Waveform and Vector to only be displayed, as
described on page 3-86.
VTM Classic
Pressing and holding the MLT button accesses the MLT DISPLAY menu. From the
MLT DISPLAY menu, select VTM classic to have the VTM Series convert the screen
to the classic VTM style display, as shown in Figure 3-54.
3-78
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Figure 3-54. VTM Classic Display Diagram
Table 3-46. Description of Simultaneous VTM Classic Display
Key
Description
1
Model identification
2
Latest Alarm indication with the date and time the alarm occurred. Highlighted in yellow when active.
3
Location of the Lissajous (X, Y) display of the audio input meter or the AUX location in the 5.1 and
AUX/LFE in 6.1 CineSound display.
4
Icon status indication.
5
Date and time of internal clock.
6
Company name.
7
Location of the audio.
8
Audio phase bar when audio graticule meters are displayed.
9
Indicates the input selection
10
Indicates the format and input channels
11
Alarm display
12
Indicates the format selection.
13
Vector Gain indication
14
Vector or Gamut display of selected inputs.
15
Indicates the detected or selected video standard.
16
Indicates the reference.
17
Waveform gain indication
18
Indicates the Filter selection.
(Table continues on next page)
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-79
General Operation
Table 3-46. Description of Simultaneous VTM Classic Display (continued)
Key
Description
19
Waveform or Eye Pattern and Jitter display of selected input(s).
20
Indicates the selected aspect ratio of the picture.
21
Picture Gamut indication.
22
Indicates the Closed Caption selection.
23
Displays the picture for the selected input.
The VTM Classic panes are located in fixed pane locations. Panes cannot be moved
while in this mode. Press the appropriate display button to highlight and change a
function selection (i.e. from vector to gamut or waveform to eye pattern). The VTM
classic display can only utilize a single input.
The panes are linked together for Line select and cursor movement. When line select is
enabled, the WFM and VEC are in line select and the picture cursor show and follow
the line selection.
The alarm log changes in VTM Classic mode. When an alarm is first registered, it
appears at the top of the alarm display area in yellow. If the alarm is short term (i.e.,
two seconds or less), the alarm text reverts to the original graticule color after
approximately two seconds. If the alarm continues longer than two seconds, the text
remains yellow and the alarm duration is incremented. When the next alarm occurs,
the previous alarm moves down one position.
The VTM Series has enough memory for 200 alarms per input. When 200 different
alarm events have occurred, alarm number 200 is dropped and the most recent alarm is
tagged as 1. Use the UP or DOWN NAVIGATION buttons to scroll through the alarm
list. Figure 3-55 shows a sample alarm in VTM Classic mode.
Figure 3-55. Sample Alarm Message
3-80
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Table 3-47. Description of Sample Alarm Message
Key
Description
1
Index number, from 1-200
2
Alarm type, which describes the error
3
Date and time (the internal clock setting in month/day/year and hour:minute:second)
4
Time code, which is from the LTC/CLOCK, VITC, or D-VITC (shown in
day:hour:minute:second:frame)
5
Duration, which is the length of time that the error occurred (shown in hour:minute:second)
6
Scroll UP and DOWN indication. Use the UP and DOWN NAVIGATION buttons to scroll
through the alarm list.
Data Analyzer Display (TVM-OPT AAP Option)
NOTE: Data display only operates with Digital Inputs.
NOTE 2: When Data Analyzer is utilized, the unit is forced into Line Select mode.
Pressing and holding the MLT button accesses the MLT DISPLAY menu. From the
MLT DISPLAY menu, select DATA ANALYZER to display the data word analyzer.
The data display contains the data and the picture zoom box. A picture zoom box also
appears in the picture display.
To navigate through the Data display, select the Data pane. Once selected, press the
UP NAVIGATION button to page up the Data Display. Press the DOWN
NAVIGATION button to page down the Data Display.
The data samples per page actually represent two unique pixels. Both of these pixels
have exactly the same color information, formed from the combination of one CB and
one CR sample. That color information is combined with the first Y sample (the
“cosited” Y sample) for the first pixel of the group and combined with the second Y
sample (Y’, or Y prime) for the second pixel.
The Pixel Cursor and the zoomed picture elements are displayed next to the data. The
target area within the Pixel Cursor reflects the Pixel Group Display menu selection 2H,
8H, or 2H x 4V. When selecting Data Analyzer, the pixel cursor appears on the picture
pane. The Pixel cursor shows the location of the data displayed in the Data zoom pane.
Look at the Picture Zoom display for the precise location of the Data display cursor.
The Pixel Cursor is described in Pixel Cursor on page 3-82.
Referring to item 6 in Figure 3-56, the first pixel will be formed from the samples
1440, 1441, and 1442. The color information for this pixel comes from CB and CR, or
samples 1440 and 1442. Sample 1441 is the unique Y sample.
When Line Select is enabled, the cursor on the picture can be moved up and down with
the CURVED ARROW Knob. Pressing the UP and DOWN navigation buttons move
the cursor left and right.
A sample Data Mode display is shown in Figure 3-56 and described in Table 3-48.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-81
General Operation
Figure 3-56. Data Mode Display
Table 3-48. Description of Data Mode Display
Key
Indicator
Description
1
LINE
Indicator that shows the line number of the picture along with the Even (E)
and/or Odd (O) line selection. The line number corresponds to the cursor on
the picture.
2
SAMPLE
Indicates the selected pixel samples inside the pixel cursor.
3
PIXEL
Complete information for two Pixels.
4
ELEMENTS
Elements that show the component samples for each pixel. There are two
l
elements per pixel sample grouping: CB, Y and CR, Y .
5
DATA
Value of CB, Y, CR, and Yl in Decimal, Hex, or Binary form.
6
CURSOR
Cursor for the Data Zoom Display. Represents the exact location of the
cursor in the Picture Display. The cursor area indicates the pixels that are
represented in the Pixel, Element, and Data columns.
7
PICTURE ZOOM
Zoomed portion of the picture display to show the precise pixel locations.
Pixel Cursor
When selecting Data Analyzer, the pixel cursor appears on the picture display. The
Pixel cursor in the picture display shows the general location of the data displayed in
the Data Zoom pane. Look at the Picture Zoom display for the precise location of the
Data display cursor. Rotate the HORIZONTAL LEFT/RIGHT knob to move the pixel
cursor horizontally (left and right). Also, when the LINE button is enabled (the LINE
button is high tally), turn the CURVED ARROW knob to move the pixel cursor
vertically (up and down), and to change the line. As the cursor is adjusted, the data in
the data display changes.
3-82
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
The target area within the Pixel Cursor reflects the Pixel Group Display menu selection
2H, 8H, or 2H x 4V.
Pressing the ENT button will access the next event determined by the DATA SEARCH
or ALARM SEARCH criteria in the Data Analyzer Setup menu. Every press of the
ENT button will move the cursor to the next Data Search or Alarm Search result.
NOTE: When scrolling the data pixel cursor, the cursor will stop or disappear when it reaches the limits
of the active video. The picture zoom will continue to move within the vertical or horizontal blanking
regions. The data area, located in the lower left of the display, will continue to scroll, and show all of
the data on the line. The data will not agree with the cursor in the Picture Zoom Area when the picture
zoom stops scrolling. When the extreme horizontal or vertical limits are reached, the pixel cursor will
jump to the other side of the picture and continue to scroll into the active video region. The picture
zoom cursor and the data display will show the same pixel information when the picture cursor is within
the active video region.
Data Display Pop-up Menu
The DATA DISPLAY menu selections are used to set Data Analyzer functions. Press
and hold the ENT button when the Data Display is shown and selected to access the
Data menu. The Data Display submenu items are described in Table 3-49.
Table 3-49. Data Analyzer Setup Menu
TRIGGER ON ALARM
OFF
ON
DATA DISPLAY FORMAT
HEX (Default)
DECIMAL
BINARY
PIXEL GROUP DISPLAY
2H
8H (Default)
2H x 4V
NAVIGATION MODE
NORMAL
DATA SEARCH
ALARM SEARCH
DATA SEARCH
(See Data Search on page 3-85 for
complete List)
CUSTOM DATA SEARCH
000 TO FFF (Hexadecimal values)
Trigger on Alarm
NOTE: Only if the alarms are enabled via the Alarms menu will an alarm occur and activate the Trigger
on Alarm feature.
Trigger on Alarm is used to freeze the waveform and vector, show where an alarm
occurred, and highlight the information for the pixel that is creating the alarm. The
highlighted pixel data is shown in the Data display. The waveform and vector then
changes color, and the pixel cursor is placed over the first pixel creating the alarm.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-83
General Operation
The pixel data that created the alarm is highlighted in yellow in the Data Display. For
multiple alarms, press the NAVIGATION ▲ (UP) and NAVIGATION ▼ (DOWN)
buttons to move between the pixel information of each alarm.
Press the EXIT button to clear the capture and the highlighted pixel information. The
highlighted information will reappear if the alarm is still active.
Data Display Format
The Data Display Format is used to determine the numeric base for the pixel
information that is displayed: Decimal, Hex, or Binary.
Pixel Group Display
Pixel Group Display is used to determine the cursor size and the samples displayed.
The Pixel Group Display selections are:
•
2H: 2 pixel on the same line
•
8H: 8 pixel samples from the same line
•
2H x 4V: 2 horizontal pixels and 4 vertical pixels
Navigation Mode
Navigation mode is used to choose between three search selections. The Navigation
mode selections are NORMAL, DATA SEARCH, and ALARM SEARCH.
•
NORMAL: Navigates the data display normally.
•
DATA SEARCH: Enables data search mode. When enabled, the values
correspond to the data ID selection made in the DATA SEARCH menu are
highlighted. Press the ENT button to select the lines containing the selected data
ID.
•
ALARMS SEARCH: When selected, the pixel data that created the alarm is
highlighted in yellow in the Data Display. For multiple alarms, press the ENT
button to move between the pixel information of each alarm.
Some alarms that are triggered will have an “H” indication for High or Upper and
an “L” indication for Low or Lower indication when the alarm search is performed.
The alarms that show these indications are Luma Upper and Lower, RGB Upper
and Lower, and Peak Upper and Lower.
To search for a specific alarm after the data capture has been performed, turn off all
alarms except the alarm to be searched in the captured data display. Note that when
this happens, the disabled alarms will not be enabled in the live display. Therefore,
no disabled alarm can be triggered and registered in the Alarm Log until the alarms
are enabled again. Once all alarms, except the alarm(s) to be searched, are
disabled, the Alarms Search feature will only search for the enabled alarm(s) in the
captured data display.
3-84
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Data Search
The Data Search menu is used to select the data ID of the ancillary data that will be
highlighted when Data Search mode is enabled in the Navigation Mode menu. The
Data Search selections are:
200 Undefined format
180 Marked packets for deletion
260 Ancillary Time code
284 Data End Marker Packet
288 Data Start Marker Packet
1E3 299M, HDTV, control, Group 1
2E2 299M, HDTV, control, Group 2
2E1 299M, HDTV, control, Group 3
1E0 299M, HDTV, control, Group 4
2E7 299M, HDTV, audio, Group 1
1E6 299M, HDTV, audio, Group 2
1E5 299M, HDTV, audio, Group 3
2E4 299M, HDTV, audio, Group 4
2FF AES audio data, Group 1
1FD AES audio data, Group 2
1FB AES audio data, Group 3
2F9 AES audio data, Group 4
1EF AES control packet, Group 1
2EE AES control packet, Group 2
2ED AES control packet, Group 3
1EC AES control packet, Group 4
1FE AES extended packet, Group 1
2FC AES extended packet, Group 2
2FA AES extended packet, Group 3
FF8 AES extended packet, Group 4
2F0 METADATA packets
1F4 Error detection (EDH)
2F5 Time code
161/101 Closed Caption (EIA-708-B)
161/102 Closed caption (EIA-608 data)
162/101 Program Description DTV
162/102 Data Broadcast (DTV)
162/203 VBI Data
Custom
Custom Data Search
The Custom Data search is used to select a specific Data ID of the ancillary data that
may not be listed in the data search menu. The value is in hexadecimal form.
Timing Custom Display
Selecting the Timing Custom Display creates a fixed three-pane display with the
Timing Display filling the top two horizontal panes. The Timing pane status
information appears in the lower-left section of the pane.
The Vector or Gamut display is the lower-left pane. The waveform display is the
lower-right display. These displays cannot be moved. Selecting the pane and then
pressing and holding the WFM, VEC, GAMUT, or TIMING function buttons open the
associated pane menu.
A sample illustration of the Timing Custom Display is shown in Figure 3-57.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-85
General Operation
Figure 3-57. Custom Timing Display
The upper-left DISPLAY button is high tally when the timing display is selected.
WFM/VEC Only Display (Dual-Screen Display)
Pressing and holding the MLT button accesses the MLT DISPLAY menu. From the
MLT DISPLAY menu, select WFM/VEC ONLY to display the dual Waveform and
Vector display. The Vector or Gamut display appears in the upper-left pane, and the
waveform or eye pattern display appears in the upper-right pane. The lower two panes
are off and not functional while using this display.
A sample illustration of the Waveform/Vector only display is shown in Figure 3-58.
Figure 3-58. WFM/VEC Only Display
3-86
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
Presets
Presets are used to store menu configurations and display settings. A
total of 15 presets can be stored in the VTM Series. Press PRESET
button 1 to 8 to select a preset from the associated bank of presets.
Preset bank A contains presets 1 to 8. Preset bank B contains presets 9
to 16. Press the STAR button to toggle between preset banks A and B.
The STAR button is low tally when using the first bank of presets containing
Presets 1 to 8, and high tally when using the second bank of presets
containing Preset 9 to 16. Press and hold the * button to access the preset
menu. The Preset menu is described in Table 3-50. Preset *8 is locked as the factory
default, and cannot be changed. For more information on Preset *8, see page 3-87.
Storing Presets
NOTE: Freeze Mode configurations cannot be stored in a preset. Also, any data that is frozen in freeze
mode cannot be stored in a preset. For more information on Freeze Mode, see Freeze and Freeze + Live
Mode on page 3-89.
To store a preset in bank A, press and hold the desired preset number button (1 to 8) for
three seconds. The number button is high tally upon release after holding the button
for three seconds. Also, a beep will sound if the Aural alert is enabled in the SYSTEM
SETUP menu.
To store a preset in bank B, first press the STAR till the STAR button is high tally.
Once the STAR button is high tally, press and hold the desired preset number button (1
to 7) for three seconds. The number button is high tally upon release.
Recalling Presets
NOTE: Information must be stored in a preset location before being recalled.
Press any number from 1 to 8 to directly select the stored preset in bank A. Press
STAR and any number from 1 to 7 to directly select the stored preset in bank B. Press
preset *8 to select the factory default settings. Preset STAR 8 is never empty and will
recall the factory default settings.
If a preset does not exist for the selected number when selected, nothing happens.
Preset *8 (Factory Preset)
Press Preset 8 in bank B (when the * is high tally) to access the factory-preset mode.
This preset contains the factory default settings.
Preset Setup Menu
Press and hold the * button to access the preset menu. The Preset Setup menu is
described in Table 3-50.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-87
General Operation
Table 3-50. Preset Setup Menu
NAME PRESET
1 TO 8
RENAME SCREEN
NAME * PRESET
*1 TO *7
RENAME SCREEN
CLEAR PRESET
1 TO 8
PRESS ENT
CLEAR * PRESET
*1 TO *7
PRESS ENT
ALL
PRESS ENT
PRESS ENT
-
SETUP
Name Preset
The NAME PRESET menu is used to name bank A preset locations using the Rename
screen. On the Rename screen use the RIGHT and LEFT NAVIGATION buttons to
move between character locations, and use the UP and DOWN NAVIGATION buttons
to select a character in the highlighted character location. When complete, press the
RIGHT or LEFT NAVIGATION buttons until ACCEPT or CANCEL is highlighted.
ACCEPT saves the data. CANCEL will not save the data. This is useful for when a
preset is saved to a USB device.
Name * Preset
The NAME * PRESET menu is used to name bank B preset location using the Rename
screen. On the Rename screen use the RIGHT and LEFT NAVIGATION buttons to
move between character locations, and use the UP and DOWN NAVIGATION buttons
to select a character in the highlighted character location. When complete, press the
RIGHT or LEFT NAVIGATION buttons until ACCEPT or CANCEL is highlighted.
ACCEPT saves the data. CANCEL will not save the data. This is useful for when a
preset is saved to a USB device.
Clear Preset
The Clear Preset menu is used to clear the preset and the preset name in bank A. Press
ENT to clear both the preset and CUSTOM name from the memory. Preset *8 cannot
be configured with this menu item.
Clear * Preset
The Clear * Preset menu is used to clear the preset and the preset name in bank B.
Press ENT to clear both the preset and CUSTOM name from the memory. Preset *8
cannot be configured with this menu item.
Setup
Press the ENT button to access the global setup menu. For more information on the
global Setup menu see Section 4.
Capturing a Display
The VTM Series is capable of holding frame-captured displays in internal
memory. The DISP button is high tally when a capture is performed or
recalled. If no frame had been captured in the pane, press the DISP button to
3-88
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
General Operation
capture the screen. The DISP button is high tally when a frame is captured. Only one
captured frame can be cached in the unit at a time. The frame will remain cached until
the frame is cleared. Once the frame is frozen and the DISP button is high tally, press
the DISP button to toggle between the captured frame and the live frame.
Clear Captured Frame
While a live screen is shown, press and hold the DISP button to access the DISP menu.
The DISP menu contains the CLEAR XGA CAPTURE menu. Select CLEAR XGA
CAPTURE and press the ENT button to clear the frozen frame in the pane. Once the
frozen frame is cleared from the pane, a new frame capture can be performed.
Capturing Display Information
The VTM Series is capable of holding frame-captured information. If no
data has been captured, press the SDI button to capture the data in that pane.
The SDI button is high tally when information is captured. Only one capture can be
cached in the unit at a time. The data will remain cached until the data is cleared.
Once the data is frozen and the SDI button is high tally, press the SDI button to toggle
between displaying the captured data and the live data.
When selecting a different pane, the SDI button will change according to the current
configuration of that pane (i.e. if the captured data in the cache is displayed or not
displayed). When returning to a pane that already contains and displays the cached
captured data, the SDI button reaches a high-tally state.
When MULTI mode DATA ANALYZER display is selected, the SDI button selection
affects all the panes on the display.
Press and hold the SDI button to access the SDI menu. The SDI menu consists of the
Clear Capture and Freeze mode menu items.
SDI is deselected if the SDI button is pressed, the input changes, or a format changes
for the selected input signal. A FORMAT MISMATCH error occurs when the
currently selected format for the pane is different than the format of the frozen data in
the cache. SDI capture cannot be performed when an audio pane is the active pane.
Clear Captured Data
Press and hold the SDI button to access the SDI menu. The SDI menu contains the
CLEAR SDI CAPTURE menu. Select CLEAR SDI CAPTURE and press the ENT
button to clear the frozen information in the pane. Once the frozen data is cleared from
the pane, a new data capture can be performed.
Freeze and Freeze + Live Mode
Freeze mode contains two selections: Freeze and Freeze + Live. Selecting Freeze
mode will separate the frozen display from the live display. When SDI is high tally,
data that was captured in the cache is displayed. When the SDI button is low tally, the
Live data is displayed.
Freeze + Live is selected to show live display overlaying the captured display.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
3-89
General Operation
Blank Page
3-90
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Section 4 ♦ Global Setup Menu Functions
Navigating the Setup Menu
Press the SETUP button to access the global setup menu. Use the SETUP POSITION
knobs or the NAVIGATION buttons to navigate the Global Setup menu. Pane menu.
The SETUP POSITION knobs and Navigation buttons are described below:
- Press to enter the Setup menu.
- Press to exit from the Setup menu.
Press to exit the Rename or Matrix screen, or the Setup menu.
- Press to move up in the menu or Matrix screen.
- Press to select a character in the Rename screen.
- Press to move left in the menu or Matrix screen.
- Press to select the previous character in the Rename screen.
Press to move right in the Menu, Matrix, or Rename screen.
- Press to move down in the menu, or Matrix screen.
- Press to scroll down the list of characters in the Rename screen.
- Rotate the knob to move the menu cursor up and down or to change a
value or condition in a menu.
- Press the knob to select a menu item.
- Press the knob to exit the displayed Rename or Matrix screen or the
entire Setup menu.
- Rotate to change a character in the Renaming screen, or move to the
corresponding box up or down in the Matrix screen.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-1
Global Setup Menu Functions
- Rotate the knob to move forwards or backwards in the menu.
- Press to select a character or matrix box in the Rename or Matrix
screens.
- Rotate to select the previous or next box in the Matrix or Rename
screens.
- Rotate the knob to move the menu cursor up and down.
- Rotate the knob to select a character in the Rename screen or move up
and down in the Matrix screen.
- Press to select a menu item or a Matrix box.
- Press to move to the next character box in the Rename screen.
Setup Menu and Alarm Tables
The following tables make up the global setup menu. “(Default)” is shown next to
each of the default menu selections. The Setup menu items are listed in Table 4-1 with
the Table and Description Pages:
Table 4-1. Setup Menu Tables
Setup Menu Item
Table Page
Description Page
Video Format Menu
4-3
4-31
Waveform Setup Menu
4-6
4-31
Eye Pattern Setup Menu
4-7
4-33
Vector Setup Menu
4-7
4-33
Gamut Setup Menu
4-7
4-34
Picture Setup Menu
4-8
4-35
Audio Setup Menu**
-
-
Audio Alarms Menu**
-
-
Video Alarms, Digital Menu
4-10
5-2*
Video Alarms, Analog Menu
4-15
5-7*
Time Code Alarms Menu
4-21
5-10*
TS (Transport Stream) Alarms
Menu
4-22
5-11*
Display Setup Menu
4-26
4-38
Communications Menu
4-27
4-40
*NOTE: The alarm descriptions are in Section 5 ♦ Alarm Descriptions.
** NOTE: For information on Audio, see the A3-OPT 3, A3-OPT 4, A3-OPT 5, and A3-4004 Installation
and Operation Handbook.
(Table continues on next page)
4-2
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-1. Setup Menu Tables (continued)
Setup Menu Item
Table Page
Description Page
System Menu
4-30
4-44
About Menu
4-30
4-50
Table 4-2. Video Format Menu
ENABLE DUAL LINK A-B*
VIDEO A CONFIGURE
OFF
-
YCbCr
-
RGB
-
AUTODETECT (Default)
-
1080i/60
-
1080i/59.94
-
1080i/50
-
1080p/30
-
1080p/29.97
-
1080p/25
-
1080p/24
-
1080p/23.98
-
1080p/30sF
-
1080p/29.97sF
-
1080p/25sF
-
1080p/24sF
-
1080p/23.98sF
-
720p/60
-
720p/59.94
-
720p/50
-
720p/30
-
720p/29.97
-
720p/24
-
720p/23.98
-
625/50
-
525/59.94
-
*NOTE: Only if A and B are HD capable.
(Table continues on next page)
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-3
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-2. Video Format Menu (continued)
VIDEO B CONFIGURE
ENABLE DUAL LINK C-D*
VIDEO C CONFIGURE
AUTODETECT (Default)
-
1080i/60
-
1080i/59.94
-
1080i/50
-
1080p/30
-
1080p/29.97
-
1080p/25
-
1080p/24
-
1080p/23.98
-
1080p/30sF
-
1080p/29.97sF
-
1080p/25sF
-
1080p/24sF
-
1080p/23.98sF
-
720p/60
-
720p/59.94
-
720p/50
-
720p/30
-
720p/29.97
-
720p/24
-
720p/23.98
-
625/50
-
525/59.94
-
OFF
-
YCbCr
-
RGB
-
AUTODETECT (Default)
-
1080i/60
-
1080i/59.94
-
1080i/50
-
1080p/30
-
1080p/29.97
-
*NOTE: Only if C and D are HD capable.
4-4
(Table continues on next page)
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-2. Video Format Menu (continued)
VIDEO C CONFIGURE
VIDEO D CONFIGURE
1080p/25
-
1080p/24
-
1080p/23.98
-
1080p/30sF
-
1080p/29.97sF
-
1080p/25sF
-
1080p/24sF
-
1080p/23.98sF
-
720p/60
-
720p/59.94
-
720p/50
-
720p/30
-
720p/29.97
-
720p/24
-
720p/23.98
-
625/50
-
525/59.94
-
NTSC*
-
PAL*
-
AUTODETECT (Default)
-
1080i/60
-
1080i/59.94
-
1080i/50
-
1080p/30
-
1080p/29.97
-
1080p/25
-
1080p/24
-
1080p/23.98
-
1080p/30sF
-
1080p/29.97sF
-
1080p/25sF
-
1080p/24sF
-
*NOTE: Only available with inputs C and D when the VTM-OPT ACV-2 option.
(Table continues on next page)
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-5
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-2. Video Format Menu (continued)
VIDEO D CONFIGURE
(CONT)
SOURCE ID
1080p/23.98sF
-
720p/60
-
720p/59.94
-
720p/50
-
720p/30
-
720p/29.97
-
720p/24
-
720p/23.98
-
625/50
-
525/59.94
-
NTSC*
-
PAL*
-
INPUT A
Rename Screen (Rename and select
ACCEPT or CANCEL)
INPUT B
Rename Screen (Rename and select
ACCEPT or CANCEL)
OPTION C
Rename Screen (Rename and select
ACCEPT or CANCEL)
OPTION D
Rename Screen (Rename and select
ACCEPT or CANCEL)
*NOTE: Only available with inputs C and D when the VTM-OPT ACV-2 option.
Table 4-3. Waveform Setup Menu
DIGITAL WAVEFORM GRATICULE
PERCENT
VOLTS (Default)
NTSC PEDESTAL
OFF
ON (7.5 IRE)
PAL WAVEFORM SCALE
UNITS
VOLTS (Default)
DC RESTORE (Only available with
TVM-OPT ACV-2 option)
OFF
SLOW (Default)
FAST
WAVEFORM INTENSITY
25% TO 200% (100% NORMAL)
WAVEFORM CONTRAST
25% TO 200% (100% NORMAL)
PERSISTENCE
NORMAL, 1 TO 6 & INFINITE
(NORMAL is Default)
ATTACK
LOW (1) TO 6, and MAX (5 is Default)
ERROR HIGHLIGHTING
OFF
ON
4-6
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-4. Eye Pattern Setup Menu
JITTER DISPLAY TYPE
0 TO 1.0 UI (Default)
0 TO 0.2 UI
0 TO 3700 pS
0 TO 740 pS
EYE INTENSITY
25% TO 200% (100% is NORMAL)
EYE CONTRAST
25% TO 200% (100% is NORMAL)
PERSISTENCE
NORMAL, 1 to 6, & INFINITE
(NORMAL is Default)
ATTACK
LOW, 2 TO 6, MAX (LOW is Default)
Table 4-5. Vector Setup Menu
PAL OVERLAY
NORMAL (Default)
OVERLAY
SD I/Q LINES
OFF (Default)
ON
VECTOR INTENSITY
25% TO 200% (100% is NORMAL)
VECTOR CONTRAST
25% TO 200% (100% is NORMAL)
PERSISTENCE
NORMAL, 1 TO 6, & INFINITE
(NORMAL is Default)
ATTACK
LOW, 2 TO 6, MAX (LOW is Default)
Table 4-6. Gamut Setup Menu
GAMUT INTENSITY
25% TO 200% (100% is NORMAL)
GAMUT CONTRAST
25% TO 200% (100% is NORMAL)
PERSISTENCE
NORMAL, 1 TO 6, & INFINITE (NORMAL is Default)
COLOR PLOT
SINGLE COLOR
RGB (Default)
DATA ERROR PERSISTENCE
NORMAL, 1 TO 6, & INFINITE (NORMAL is Default)
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-7
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-7. Picture Setup Menu
THUMBNAIL
UPPER LEFT PANE
UPPER LEFT
UPPER RIGHT
LOWER LEFT
LOWER RIGHT
OFF (Default)
UPPER RIGHT PANE
UPPER LEFT
UPPER RIGHT
LOWER LEFT
LOWER RIGHT
OFF (Default)
LOWER LEFT PANE
UPPER LEFT
UPPER RIGHT
LOWER LEFT
LOWER RIGHT
OFF (Default)
LOWER RIGHT PANE
UPPER LEFT
UPPER RIGHT
LOWER LEFT
LOWER RIGHT
OFF (Default)
MARKERS
CENTER
OFF (Default)
ON
SAFE TITLE
OFF (Default)
CORNERS
BOX
SAFE ACTION
OFF (Default)
CORNERS
BOX
CLEAN APERTURE
OFF (Default)
CORNERS
BOX
CLOSED CAPTION
DISPLAY
OFF (Default)
-
CC1
-
CC2
-
CC3
-
CC4
-
T1
(Table continues on next page)
4-8
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-7. Picture Setup Menu (continued)
CLOSED CAPTION
DISPLAY (CONT)
T2
-
T3
-
T4
-
708
-
EIA 708 SERVICE
SERVICE 1 to 7
XDS
OFF (Default)
ON
LINE 6 – see Table 4-17 on pg 4-37
SIZE
SMALL (Default)
LARGE
ANAMORPHIC
TIME CODE
OFF
-
ON
-
ENABLE
-
LTC/DVITC
-
POSITION
TOP
MIDDLE (Default if ON is selected)
BOTTOM
BRIGHTNESS
25% TO 200% (100% is Normal)
-
CONTRAST
25% TO 200% (100% is Normal)
-
COLOR
ON (Color) (Default)
-
OFF (Mono)
-
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
OFF
-
ON
-
BLUE GUN
RED GUN
GREEN GUN
VBI MASK
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-9
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-8. Video Alarms, Digital Menu
ALARM
REPORTING SETUP
MATRIX SCREEN
-
-
FORMAT CHANGE
OFF (Default)
-
-
ON
-
-
RGB UPPER
ENABLE
OFF (Default)
DIGITAL GAMUT
ON
RGB LOWER
THRESHOLD
650 TO 750 mV (710 mV
is Default)
SENSITIVITY
1 TO 20 CES (15 CES is
Default)
DURATION
0 TO 60 Seconds (2
Seconds is Default)
ENABLE
OFF (Default)
ON
LUM UPPER
THRESHOLD
-50 TO 50 mV (-10 mV is
Default)
SENSITIVITY
1 TO 20 CES (15 CES is
Default)
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
ENABLE
OFF (Default)
ON
THRESHOLD 525
NTSC IRE:
90 TO 108 IRE
(105 is Default)
PAL UNITS:
92 TO 109 UNITS
(107 UNITS is
Default)
THRESHOLD 625
PAL mV:
643 TO 762 mV
(750 mV is Default)
LUM LOWER
SENSITIVITY
1 TO 20 CES (15 CES is
Default)
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
ENABLE
OFF (Default)
ON
THRESHOLD 525
NTSC IRE:
1.5 TO 20 IRE
(1.5 is Default)
(Table continues on next page)
4-10
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-8. Video Alarms, Digital Menu (continued)
DIGITAL GAMUT
(CONT)
LUM LOWER
(CONT)
PAL UNITS:
-7 TO 20 UNITS
(-4 UNITS is Default)
THRESHOLD 625
PAL mV:
-46 TO 143 mV
(-35 mV is Default)
PEAK UPPER
SENSITIVITY
1 TO 20 CES (15 CES is
Default)
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
THRESHOLD 525
NTSC IRE:
50 TO 140 IRE
(120 is Default)
PAL UNITS:
51 TO 143 UNITS
(123 UNITS is
Default)
THRESHOLD 625
PAL mV:
357 TO 1000 mV
(857 mV is Default)
PEAK LOWER
SENSITIVITY
1 TO 20 CES (2 CES is
Default)
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
THRESHOLD 525
NTSC IRE:
-40 TO 0 IRE
(-20 is Default)
THRESHOLD 625
PAL UNITS:
-40 TO 0 UNITS
(-20 UNITS is
Default)
PAL mV:
-285 TO 0 mV
(-142 mV is Default)
EDH - SD
SENSITIVITY
1 TO 20 CES (2 CES is
Default)
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
OFF (Default)
-
-
ON
-
-
DURATION
0 TO 60 Seconds (2
Seconds is Default)
(Table continues on next page)
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-11
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-8. Video Alarms, Digital Menu (continued)
CRC- HD
LOSS OF CARRIER
LOSS OF ACTIVE
VIDEO – DIG
LOSS OF
REFERENCE
LETTERBOX - SD
OFF
-
-
ON
-
-
DURATION
0 TO 60 Seconds (2
Seconds is Default)
-
OFF
-
-
ON
-
-
DURATION
0 TO 60 Seconds (2
Seconds is Default)
-
OFF (Default)
-
-
ON
-
-
THRESHOLD
0 TO 350 mV (300 mV is
Default)
-
SENSITIVITY
2 TO 20 CES (2 CES is
Default)
-
DURATION
0 TO 60 0 TO 60
Seconds (2 Seconds is
Default)
-
OFF (Default)
-
-
ON
-
-
DURATION
0 TO 60 Seconds (2
Seconds is Default)
-
TOP BORDER
ENABLE
-
END OF TOP BORDER
525
NTSC LINES:
+21 TO +139
(21 is Default)
END OF TOP BORDER
625
PAL LINES:
+19 TO +159
(19 is Default)
ENABLE
-
START OF BOTTOM
BORDER 525
NTSC LINES:
+140 TO +262
(140 is Default)
START OF BOTTOM
BORDER 625
PAL LINES:
+160 TO +312
(160 is Default)
BOTTOM BORDER
(Table continues on next page)
4-12
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-8. Video Alarms, Digital Menu (continued)
LETTERBOX – SD
(CONT)
PILLAR BOX - HD
THRESHOLD
10 TO 350 mV (286 mV
is Default)
-
DURATION
0 TO 60 Seconds (2
Seconds is Default)
-
LEFT BORDER
ENABLE
-
END OF LEFT BORDER
+1 TO +860
(1 is Default)
ENABLE
-
START OF RIGHT
BORDER
+861 TO +1920
(1920 is Default)
THRESHOLD
10 TO 350 mV (286 mV
is Default)
-
DURATION
0 TO 60 Seconds (2
Seconds is Default)
-
OFF (Default)
-
-
ON
-
-
THRESHOLD
0 TO 350 mV (2 mV is
Default)
-
VERTICAL
1 TO 200 LINES (2
LINES is Default)
-
HORIZONTAL
1 TO 300 PIXELS (2
PIXELS is Default)
-
CC NOT DETECTED
- 608
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
DURATION
10 TO 600 SECONDS
(240 SEC is Default)
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
DURATION
10 TO 600 SECONDS
(240 SEC is Default)
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
DURATION
10 TO 600 SECONDS
(240 SEC is Default)
RIGHT BORDER
PICTURE SHIFT
CAPTIONING
CC NOT UPDATING
– 608
CC NOT DETECTED
– 708
(Table continues on next page)
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-13
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-8. Video Alarms, Digital Menu (continued)
CAPTIONING
(CONT)
CC NOT UPDATING
– 708
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
DURATION
10 TO 600 SECONDS
(240 SEC is Default)
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
DURATION
10 TO 600 SECONDS
(240 SEC is Default)
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
DURATION
10 TO 600 SECONDS
(240 SEC is Default)
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
DURATION
10 TO 600 SECONDS
(240 SEC is Default)
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
DURATION
10 TO 600 SECONDS
(240 SEC is Default)
WSS (WIDE
SCREEN
SIGNALING) NOT
DETECTED
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
DURATION
10 TO 600 SECONDS
(240 SEC is Default)
XDS NOT
DETECTED
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
DURATION
10 TO 600 SECONDS
(240 SEC is Default)
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
DURATION
10 TO 600 SECONDS
(240 SEC is Default)
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
THRESHOLD SD
100 TO 3700 ps (100 ps
is Default)
-
THRESHOLD HD
50 TO 670 ps (50 ps is
Default)
-
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
-
TT NOT DETECTED
– SD
TT NOT UPDATING
– SD
ST (SUBTITLE) NOT
DETECTED
ST (SUBTITLE) NOT
UPDATING
XDS NOT
UPDATING
EYE JITTER
ENABLE
(Table continues on next page)
4-14
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-8. Video Alarms, Digital Menu (continued)
TIMING ALARM
ENABLE
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
MICROSECONDS
1 TO 64 (1 µ SECOND is
Default)
-
LINES
0 TO 50 LINE(S) (1 is
Default)
-
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
-
Table 4-9. Video Alarms, Analog Menu
ALARM
REPORTING SETUP
MATRIX SCREEN
-
-
FORMAT CHANGE
OFF (Default)
-
-
ON
-
-
OFF (Default)
-
-
ON
-
-
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
-
OFF (Default)
-
-
ON
-
-
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
-
ENABLE
OFF (Default)
-
On
-
NTSC IRE:
0 TO 50 IRE
(40 is Default)
-
LOSS OF SIGNAL
LOSS OF
REFERENCE
LOSS OF VIDEO
THRESHOLD NTSC
THRESHOLD PAL
PAL UNITS:
0 TO 51 UNITS
(41 UNITS is
Default)
-
PAL mV:
0 TO 357 mV
(287 mV is Default)
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
(Table continues on next page)
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-15
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-9. Video Alarms, Analog Menu (continued)
ANALOG GAMUT
PEAK UPPER
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
THRESHOLD NTSC
NTSC IRE:
50 TO 140 IRE
(120 is Default)
PAL UNITS:
51 TO 143 UNITS
(136 UNITS is
Default)
THRESHOLD PAL
PAL mV:
357 TO 1000 mV
(951 mV is Default)
PEAK LOWER
SENSITIVITY
1 TO 20 CES (15 CES is
Default)
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
THRESHOLD NTSC
NTSC IRE:
-40 TO 0 IRE
(-20 is Default)
PAL UNITS:
-41 TO 0 UNITS
(-34 UNITS is
Default)
THRESHOLD PAL
PAL mV:
-285 TO 143 mV
(-238 mV is Default)
LUM UPPER
SENSITIVITY
1 TO 20 CES (2 CES is
Default)
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
ENABLE
OFF (Default)
ON
ON
THRESHOLD NTSC
NTSC IRE:
50 TO 140 IRE
(105 is Default)
PAL UNITS:
51 TO 143 UNITS
(107 UNITS is
Default)
THRESHOLD PAL
PAL mV:
357 TO 1000 mV
(748 mV is Default)
SENSITIVITY
1 TO 20 CES (18 CES is
Default)
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
(Table continues on next page)
4-16
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-9. Video Alarms, Analog Menu (continued)
ANALOG GAMUT
(CONT)
LUM LOWER
ENABLE
OFF (Default)
ON
ON
THRESHOLD NTSC
NTSC IRE:
-5.0 TO 10 IRE
(-2.5 is Default)
PAL UNITS:
-10 TO 0 UNITS
(-5 UNITS is Default)
THRESHOLD PAL
PAL mV:
-70 TO 0 mV
(-35 mV is Default)
SYNC AND BURST
H SYNC UPPER
SENSITIVITY
1 TO 20 CES (18 CES is
Default)
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
ENABLE
OFF (Default)
ON
THRESHOLD NTSC
NTSC IRE:
-50 TO -42 IRE
(-45 is Default)
PAL UNITS:
-51 TO -46 UNITS
(-46 UNITS is
Default)
THRESHOLD PAL
PAL mV:
-356 TO -320 mV
(-320 mV is Default)
H SYNC LOWER
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
ENABLE
OFF (Default)
ON
THRESHOLD NTSC
NTSC IRE:
-38 TO -20 IRE
(-35 is Default)
PAL UNITS:
-42 TO -20 UNITS
(-36 UNITS is
Default)
THRESHOLD PAL
PAL mV:
-292 TO -142 mV
(-252 mV is Default)
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
(Table continues on next page)
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-17
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-9. Video Alarms, Analog Menu (continued)
SYNC AND BURST
(CONT)
BURST UPPER
ENABLE
OFF (Default)
ON
THRESHOLD NTSC
NTSC IRE:
42 TO 50 IRE
(45 is Default)
PAL UNITS:
46 TO 51 UNITS
(46 UNITS is Default)
THRESHOLD PAL
PAL mV:
321 TO 357 mV
(322 mV is Default)
BURST LEVEL
LOWER
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
ENABLE
OFF (Default)
ON
THRESHOLD NTSC
NTSC IRE:
20 TO 38 IRE
(35 is Default)
PAL UNITS:
20 TO 42 UNITS
(36 UNITS is Default)
THRESHOLD PAL
PAL mV:
143 TO 293 mV
(252 mV is Default)
BURST/CHROMA
PHASE
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
OFF
-
ON
-
ODD (Default)
-
EVEN
-
LINE
1 TO 50 LINE(S) (25
LINES is Default)
-
POSITION
0.0 TO 64.0 mS (49.5
mS is the default)
PHASE
0 TO 359.75
DEGREE(S) (283.5 is
Default)
-
RANGE
5 TO 20 DEGREE(S)
(7.5 is Default)
-
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
-
ENABLE
FIELD
(Table continues on next page)
4-18
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-9. Video Alarms, Analog Menu (continued)
H BLANKING
V BLANKING
SC/H PHASE
VITS
OFF (Default)
-
-
WIDTH NTSC
NTSC µ SECONDS:
8 TO 16 µ SECONDS
(10.9 is Default)
-
WIDTH PAL
PAL µ SECONDS:
8 TO 16 µ SECONDS
(12 is Default)
-
WINDOW
0.1 TO 0.5 µ SECONDS
(0.1 is Default)
-
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds Default)
-
ENABLE
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
WIDTH NTSC
NTSC LINE:
20 TO 25 LINE
(20 is Default)
-
WIDTH PAL
PAL LINE:
25 TO 30 LINE
(30 is Default)
-
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
-
OFF (Default)
-
-
ON
-
-
RANGE
5 TO 89 DEGREES (20
DEGREES is Default)
-
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
SECONDS Default)
-
LINES NTSC
MATRIX SCREEN:
NTSC: 10 TO 22 ODD
AND EVEN LINE (10
ODD is Default) OFF,
ACTIVE, INACTIVE
-
PAL ODD:
6 TO 23 LINES (6
ODD is Default)
OFF, ACTIVE,
INACTIVE
-
LINES PAL
PAL EVEN:
319 TO 336 LINES
(319 EVEN is
Default) OFF,
ACTIVE, INACTIVE
THRESHOLD NTSC
NTSC IRE:
0 TO 100 IRE
(40 is Default)
-
(Table continues on next page)
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-19
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-9. Video Alarms, Analog Menu (continued)
VITS (CONT)
PAL UNITS:
0 TO 102 UNITS
(41 UNITS is
Default)
THRESHOLD
-
PAL mV:
0 TO 714 mV
(287 mV is Default)
CAPTIONING
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
-
CC NOT DETECTED
– ANL
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
DURATION
0 TO 600 SECONDS (240
Seconds is Default)
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
DURATION
0 TO 600 SECONDS (240
Seconds is Default)
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
DURATION
0 TO 600 SECONDS (240
Seconds is Default)
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
DURATION
0 TO 600 SECONDS (240
Seconds is Default)
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
DURATION
0 TO 600 SECONDS (240
Seconds is Default)
CC NOT UPDATING
– ANL
TT NOT DETECTED
– ANL
TT NOT UPDATING
– ANL
XDS NOT DETCTED
– ANL
XDS NOT
UPDATING – ANL
4-20
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-10. Time Code Alarms Menu
ALARM
REPORTING SETUP
MATRIX SCREEN
-
LTC LOSS OF TIME
CODE
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
DURATION
0 TO 600 SECONDS
(240 Seconds is Default)
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
RANGE
0.2 TO 1.8 VOLTS (0.5 is
Default)
DURATION
0 TO 600 SECONDS
(240 Seconds Default)
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
RANGE
1.5 TO 10.5 LINES (10.5
is default)
DURATION
0 TO 600 SECONDS
(240 Seconds Default)
LTC TIME CODE
CONTINUITY
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
LTC/DVITC
COMPARE (TC
SYNC)
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
THRESHOLD
1 TO 30 FRAMES (1
Frame is Default)
DURATION
0 - 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
OFF
-
ON
-
DURATION
0 TO 600 SECONDS
(240 Seconds Default)
ENABLE
-
LINE 525
525 LINE:
10 TO 20 LINES
(LINE 14 is Default)
LINE 625
625 LINE:
6 TO 22 LINES
(LINE 14 is Default)
DURATION
0 TO 600 SECONDS
(240 Seconds Default)
D-VITC CONTINUITY
ENABLE
-
D-VITC CRC
ENABLE
-
DURATION
0 TO 600 SECONDS
(240 Seconds is Default)
LTC TIME CODE
LEVEL
LTC TIME CODE
FRAMING
D-VITC LOSS OF
TIME CODE
D-VITC LINE
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-21
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-11. TS Alarms Menu (VTM-OPT ASI)
ALARM
REPORTING SETUP
MATRIX SCREEN
-
-
LOSS OF SIGNAL
ENABLE
-
-
DURATION
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
-
PAT
-
-
PMT
-
-
STT
-
-
MGT
-
-
VCT
-
-
RRT
-
-
EIT
-
-
ETT
-
-
PAT
-
-
PMT
-
-
TS SYNC LOSS
ENABLE
-
DURATON
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
ENABLE
-
DURATON
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
ENABLE
-
DURATON
0.1 TO 5.0 SECONDS
(0.5 Seconds is Default)
CONTINUITY
COUNT ERROR
ENABLE
-
DURATON
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
PMT ERROR
ENABLE
-
DURATON
0.1 TO 5.0 SECONDS
(0.5 Seconds is Default)
ENABLE
-
DURATON
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
TRANSPORT
ERROR
ENABLE
-
DURATON
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
CRC ERROR (ATSC)
PAT
-
PMT
-
EIT
-
STT
-
CRC CHANGE
(ATSC)
CRC CHANGE
(DVB)
st
ETR 290 1
PRIORITY
SYNC BYTE ERROR
PAT ERROR
PID ERROR
ETR 290 2nd
PRIORITY
(Table continues on next page)
4-22
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-11. TS Alarms Menu (VTM-OPT ASI) (continued)
ETR 290 2nd
PRIORITY (CONT)
CRC ERROR (ATSC)
(CONT)
CRC ERROR (DVB)
PCR ERROR
PCR ACCURACY
PTS ERROR
CAT ERROR
ETR 290 3rd
PRIORITY
NIT ACUTAL
ERROR (DVB only)
NIT OTHER ERROR
(DVB only)
MGT
-
VCT
-
RRT
-
ETT
-
DURATON
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
PAT
-
CAT
-
PMT
-
SDT
-
NIT
-
BAT
-
TOT
-
EIT
-
DURATON
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
ENABLE
-
DISCONTINUITY
10 to 1000 ms (100 ms is
Default)
REPETITION
10 ms to 1000 ms (40 ms
is Default)
ENABLE
-
THRESHOLD
100 ns TO 2000 ns (500
ns is Default)
ENABLE
-
THRESHOLD
100 ns TO 2000 ns (500
ns is Default)
ENABLE
-
DURATON
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
ENABLE
-
SHORT RANGE
10 to 100 ms (25 ms is
Default)
RANGE
1000 ms TO 50000 ms
(10000 ms is Default)
ENABLE
-
RANGE
1000 ms TO 50000 ms
(10000 ms is Default)
(Table continues on next page)
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-23
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-11. TS Alarms Menu (VTM-OPT ASI) (continued)
ETR 290 3rd
PRIORITY (CONT)
SDT ACTUAL
ERROR (DVB only)
ENABLE
-
SHORT RANGE
10 to 100 ms (25 ms is
Default)
RANGE
1000 ms TO 50000 ms
(10000 ms is Default)
SDT OTHER ERROR
(DVB only)
ENABLE
-
RANGE
1000 ms TO 50000 ms
(10000 ms is Default)
EIT ACTUAL
ERROR (DVB only)
ENABLE
-
SHORT RANGE
10 to 100 ms (25 ms is
Default)
RANGE S0
500 ms TO 50000 ms
(2000 ms is Default)
RANGE S1
500 ms TO 50000 ms
(2000 ms is Default)
ENABLE
-
RANGE S0
500 ms TO 50000 ms
(2000 ms is Default)
RANGE S1
500 ms TO 50000 ms
(2000 ms is Default)
EIT PF ERROR (DVB
only)
ENABLE
-
UNREFFERENCED
PID ERROR
ENABLE
-
DURATON
0 TO 60 SECONDS (2
Seconds is Default)
REPETITION
ERROR (DVB)
RST ENABLE
-
RST REPETITION
10 ms TO 100 ms (25 ms
is Default)
TDT ENABLE
-
TDT SHORT RANGE
10 ms TO 100 ms (25 ms
is Default)
TDT RANGE
5000 ms TO 120000 ms
(30000 ms is Default)
SI ENABLE
-
MGT ENABLE
-
MGT RANGE
50 ms TO 2000 ms (150
ms is Default)
STT ENABLE
-
STT REPETITION
250 ms TO 60000 ms
(1000 ms is Default)
RRT ENABLE
-
RRT REPETITION
5000 ms TO 120000 ms
(60000 ms is Default)
EIT OTHER ERROR
(DVB only)
REPETITION
ERROR (ATSC)
(Table continues on next page)
4-24
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-11. TS Alarms Menu (VTM-OPT ASI) (continued)
ETR 290 3rd
PRIORITY (CONT)
REPETITION
ERROR (ATSC)
(CONT)
VCT ENABLE
-
VCT REPETITION
50 ms TO 3000 ms (400
ms is Default)
EIT ENABLE
-
EIT REPETITION
50 ms TO 20000 ms
(500 ms is Default)
BASE PID ERROR
-
-
BUFFER ERRORS
MONITORED
PROGRAM
PROGRAM 1 TO
PROGRAM 6
TBB
-
TBSB
-
MBB
-
EBB
-
BB
-
BSB
-
EMPTY BUFFER
ERROR
-
-
DATA DELAY
ERROR
-
-
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-25
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-12. Display Setup Menu
DISPLAY COLORS
MATRIX SCREEN
(See Table 4-13 on
page 4-27 for the
Display Colors Menu)
-
-
GRATICULE INTENSITY
25% TO 200% (100%
is NORMAL)
-
-
CURSOR INTENSITY
25% TO 200% (100%
is NORMAL)
-
-
XGA FREEZE
FREEZE FROM
CLOCK
OFF (Default)
-
ON
-
FREEZE ON ALARM
FIRST ALARM
MANUAL
RETURN TO
LIVE (Default)
-
FIRST ALARM
AUTO RETURN
TO LIVE
MONITOR
APECT RATIO
SCREEN SAVER
OUTPUT LEVEL
MONOCHROME
DISPLAY
4-26
LAST ALARM
AUTO RETURN
TO LIVE
-
4:3
-
16:9
-
14:9
-
16:10
-
24:10
-
OFF (Default)
-
1 TO 60 MIN
-
1V p-p (Default)
-
0.7V p-p
-
-
-
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-13. Display Colors Menu
Black*
Blue
Green
Cyan
Red
Purple
LT Gray
DK Gray
LT Blue
LT Green
LT Cyan
LT Red
LT Purple
Yellow
White
* Not available on the GRATICULE COLOR menu.
NOTE: LT=Light and DK=Dark
Table 4-14. Communications Setup Menu
RCU PORT
TERMINATION
BAUD RATE
IP CONFIGURATION
ETHERNET CONFIG
SCREEN
OFF
-
ON (Default)
-
19200 Baud
-
38400 Baud (Default)
-
57600 Baud
-
115200 Baud
-
-
-
(Table continues on next page)
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-27
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-14. Communications Setup Menu (continued)
GPI INPUT FUNCTION
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
INPUT 9
GPI OUTPUT
FUNCTION
GPO OUT 1 POLARITY
GPO OUT 2 POLARITY
GPO OUT 1 SETUP
SELECT INPUT A
-
ON AIR A
-
SELECT/ON AIR A
-
USER GPI ALARM 1
-
SELECT INPUT B
-
ON AIR B
-
SELECT/ON AIR B
-
USER GPI ALARM 2
-
SELECT INPUT C
-
ON AIR C
-
SELECT/ON AIR C
-
USER GPI ALARM 3
-
SELECT INPUT D
-
ON AIR D
-
SELECT/ON AIR D
-
USER GPI ALARM 4
-
RECALL PRESET 1
-
USER GPI ALARM 5
-
RECALL PRESET 2
-
USER GPI ALARM 6
-
RECALL PRESET 3
-
USER GPI ALARM 7
-
RECALL PRESET 4
-
USER GPI ALARM 8
-
RECALL PRESET 5
-
USER GPI ALARM 9
-
NORMALLY OPEN
(Default)
-
NORMALLY CLOSED
-
NORMALLY OPEN
(Default)
-
NORMALLY CLOSED
-
FOLLOW INPUT A
-
FOLLOW INPUT B
-
FOLLOW INPUT C
-
FOLLOW INPUT D
-
FOLLOW ALARMS
-
(Table continues on next page)
4-28
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-14. Communications Setup Menu (continued)
GPI OUTPUT
FUNCTION (CONT)
GPO OUT 2 SETUP
FOLLOW INPUT A
-
FOLLOW INPUT B
-
FOLLOW INPUT C
-
FOLLOW INPUT D
-
FOLLOW ALARMS
-
INPUT 1
RENAME SCREEN
-
INPUT 2
RENAME SCREEN
-
INPUT 3
RENAME SCREEN
-
INPUT 4
RENAME SCREEN
-
INPUT 5
RENAME SCREEN
-
INPUT 6
RENAME SCREEN
-
INPUT 7
RENAME SCREEN
-
INPUT 8
RENAME SCREEN
-
INPUT 9
RENAME SCREEN
-
GPI ALARM
REPORTING SETUP
GPI ALARM
REPORTING MATRIX
-
-
ROUTER PORT
INPUT SELECTION
GPI ALARM NAMES
A TO B (A is the
Default) for 2
inputs .
-
A TO D (A is
Default) for 4
inputs
CONFIGURATION
UNIT ID
DISABLED (Default)
-
ENABLE ROUTER
-
ENABLE SCANNER
-
ROUTER MODE
CHANNEL
CH 1 TO CH 12
-
SCANNER MODE
SEQUENCE
CHANNEL 1 TO
CHANNEL 12
-
DWELL TIME
1 TO 60 SECONDS (5
Seconds is Default)
-
CHANNEL NAMES
CHANNEL 1 TO
CHANNEL 12
RENAME
SCREEN
1 TO 99 (1 is Default)
-
-
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-29
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-15. System Setup Menu
PANEL LOCKOUT
ENTER PASSWORD
SCREEN
LOCK/UNLOCK
FRONT PANEL
PRESETS
-
CHANGE
PASSWORD
ENTER PASSWORD
ENTER PASSWORD
-
SET TIME
ENTER NEW TIME
SCREEN
-
-
TIME CODE
INPUT
ANL
LTC (Default)
-
VITC
-
VITC LINE NTSC
LINE 10 TO LINE 21
VITC LINE PAL
LINE 6 TO LINE 20
LTC (Default)
-
DVITC
-
DVITC LINE 525
LINE 10 TO LINE 21
DVITC LINE 625
LINE 6 TO LINE 20
LTC (Default)
-
ANC LTC
-
ANC DVITC
-
OFF
-
-
ON (Default)
-
-
EXIT BYPASS ON
ALARM
OFF
-
-
ON
-
-
CONTROL
ILLUMINATION
BRIGHTNESS
MIN, 2 TO 9, MAX (3 is
the Default)
-
CONTRAST
MIN, 2 TO 9, MAX (3 is
the Default)
-
AUTO OFF
OFF/ON
-
AUTO OFF TIME
15, 30, 45 SECONDS, 1
TO 60 MINUTES (10
MINUTES Default)
-
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM FAULT LOG
SYSTEM FAULT LOG
SCREEN
-
FILE MANAGER
(appears when
USB drive is
attached)
FILE NAVIGATION
SCREEN
-
-
FLASH UPDATE
FROM USB
INSERT DEVICE
WITH FLASH
UPDATE
PRESS ENT to begin.
-
-
-
SD
HD
AURAL ALERT
Table 4-16. About Menu
ABOUT
4-30
ABOUT SCREEN
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
Video Format Menu
The Video Format menu items are described below.
Dual Link
Inputs A and B and C and D have DUAL LINK selections. Selecting a format with
DUAL LINK forces the Input A YCBCR or RGB format to link with Input B or the
Input C YCBCR or RGB format to link with Input D. Inputs A or B cannot be linked to
inputs C or D, and inputs C or D cannot be linked with inputs A or B.
Video A, B, C, or D Configure
The Video “A, B, C, D” Configure menu is used to automatically or manually select
the video format reference standard for the selected input. The format selection
determines the unit of measure and the critical amplitude limits for the input. The
default selection, AUTODETECT, is used to automatically detect the format of the
input signal.
Source ID
The Source ID is the ID of the signal for the selected input. The default Source ID is
the input selection (Input A to Option D), but the text can be changed by using the
Rename Screen, as shown in Figure 4-1. On the Rename Screen, press the UP/DOWN
navigation buttons to change the character in the character box, and press the
RIGHT/LEFT navigation buttons to change the character box. Select ACCEPT and
ENT to accept the changed information. Select CANCEL and press ENT, or press
EXIT to cancel the changes.
Figure 4-1. Source ID Rename Screen
Waveform Setup Menu
The Waveform Setup menu is described below.
Digital Waveform Graticule
The Digital Waveform Graticule menu is used to select the unit of measurement for the
Digital Waveform Graticule. The selections are Volts or Percent. The default
selection for the Digital Waveform Graticule menu is VOLTS.
NTSC Pedestal (or 7.5 IRE Setup)
When in 525/60 Composite format, set the NTSC PEDESTAL to OFF if using a 0 IRE
pedestal signal. When set to OFF, the Vector graticules change to the proper levels in
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-31
Global Setup Menu Functions
order to display an NTSC signal without 7.5 IRE setup. The NTSC PEDESTAL
default position is ON (7.5 IRE).
PAL Waveform Scale
The PAL Waveform scale menu is used to select the unit of measurement for the PAL
Waveform. The selections are Volts or Units. The default selection for the PAL
Waveform menu is UNITS.
DC Restore (Analog Option Required)
DC Restore is used to have the voltage supplied to the analog signal in order to
maintain a DC level on the waveform. The blanking level is offset and shifts due to the
presence or absence of burst: 1 IRE unit or less. The DC Restore selections are Off,
Fast, and Slow.
•
Off = DC offset appears.
•
Slow = Hum still viewed in the signal.
•
Fast = Fully restores the signal.
Waveform Intensity
The Waveform Intensity is used to raise or lower the brightness of the displayed
waveform.
Waveform Contrast
Waveform Contrast is used to adjust the overall difference between the lightest and
darkest colors of the waveform. The range of contrast is 25% to 200%. NORMAL is
the default contrast setting.
Persistence
Persistence is used to determine how long a data point (pixel) in the waveform remains
on the display. The ranges of Persistence are NORMAL, 1 TO 6, & INFINITE.
NORMAL is the default setting.
Attack
Attack is the initial intensity that the data point (pixel) appears in the display. The
range of attack is LOW (the lowest intensity), 2 to 6, and MAX (the greatest intensity).
LOW is the default intensity.
Error Highlighting
Error highlighting changes color of the portion of the waveform that exceeds the alarm
settings. OFF is the default. The highlighting is dependent upon the format and gamut
settings selected. The following are rules to consider:
•
Composite format with Flat filter follows the alarm settings for Gamut Peak upper
and lower. It follows the threshold settings for the alarm, even when it is not
enabled.
4-32
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
•
Composite format with Low Pass filter follows the Luma Upper and Lower
thresholds.
•
Component format with RGB filter will follow the RGB gamut.
•
No highlighting in YCBCR or YRGB.
Eye Pattern Setup Menu
The Eye Pattern Setup menu is used to select the Jitter Display Type, Persistence, Eye
Intensity, Eye Contrast, and Attack.
Jitter Display Type
The Jitter Display Type menu is used to change the scale of the jitter meter.
Eye Intensity
The Eye Intensity submenu is used to raise or lower the brightness of the displayed Eye
Pattern. The range of intensity is 25% to 200%
Eye Contrast
The Eye Contrast submenu is used to adjust the overall difference between the lightest
and darkest colors of the Eye Pattern. The range of contrast is 25% to 200%.
Persistence
Persistence is used to determine how long a data point (pixel) in the Eye Pattern
remains on the display (refresh rate). The ranges of Persistence are NORMAL, 1 TO 6
& INFINITE. If INFINITE is selected, the waveform data point will always remain on
the screen.
For Eye pattern, the correlation of values derived by using measurement cursors versus
the jitter meter could differ unless the eye pattern is displayed using the maximum
persistence setting. A normal persistence setting will make it more difficult to view
pixels near the widest sample points, which forces the placement of the measurement
cursors to a lower (narrower) jitter value. Jitter can only be selected when the Eye
Pattern is enabled.
Attack
Attack is the initial intensity that the data point (pixel) appears in the display. The
range of attack is LOW (the lowest), 2 to 6, and MAX (the greatest intensity). Low is
the default intensity.
Vector Setup Menu
The Vector Setup menu is used to select the PAL Overlay, SDI I&Q, Vector Intensity,
Vector Contrast, Persistence, and Attack.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-33
Global Setup Menu Functions
PAL Overlay (Analog Option Required)
A PAL signal by default appears in parade mode. The PAL Overlay menu is used to
determine if the PAL signal should be in Parade or Overlay mode.
When in Parade mode multiple components of the same signal are shown next to one
another (i.e. Components Y, then CB, then CR in a YCBCR format). When in Overlay
mode the multiple components of the same signal are displayed over each another (i.e.
R over G over B in an RGB format).
SD I/Q Lines
The SD I/Q Lines submenu is used to turn OFF and ON the I and Q marker lines on the
Vector Display. The default condition is OFF. The I and Q marker lines only appear
in SD format.
Vector Intensity
The Vector Intensity is used to raise or lower the brightness of the displayed vector.
The range of intensity is 25% to 200%. Normal (100%) is the default.
Vector Contrast
Vector Contrast is used to adjust the overall difference between the lightest and darkest
colors of the vector. The range of contrast is 25% to 200%. Normal (100%) is the
default.
Persistence
Persistence is used to determine how long a data point (pixel) in the vector remains on
the display. The ranges of Persistence are NORMAL, 1 TO 6, and INFINITE.
Attack
Attack is the initial intensity that the data point (pixel) appears in the display. The
range of attack is LOW (the lowest intensity), 2 to 6, and MAX (the greatest intensity).
Gamut Setup Menu
The Gamut Setup menu is used to change the Gamut Intensity, Gamut Contrast,
Persistence, Attack, Color Plot, and Data Error Persistence.
Gamut Intensity
The Gamut Intensity is used to raise or lower the brightness of the displayed gamut.
The range of intensity is 25% to 200%. Normal (100%) is the default.
Gamut Contrast
Gamut Contrast is used to adjust the overall difference between the lightest and darkest
colors of the gamut. The range of contrast is 25% to 200%. Normal (100%) is the
default.
4-34
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
Persistence
Persistence is used to determine how long a data point (pixel) in the Gamut remains on
the display. The ranges of Persistence are NORMAL, 1 TO 6, & INFINITE.
Color Plot
The Color Plot is used to set the color for plotting RGB pixels. The pixels can be one
single color or individual colors (Red, Green, or Blue). Multiple colors help to indicate
which color of the RGB signal moves beyond the inner and outer parameters of the
gamut graticule. Select RGB for multiple colors.
Data Error Persistence
Data Error Persistence is used to determine how long a point of data in the Composite
Gamut remains on the display. The ranges of Persistence are NORMAL, 1 TO 6, and
INFINITE.
Error Highlighting
Error highlighting changes color of the portion of the Composite Gamut that exceeds
the digital gamut alarm settings. OFF is the default.
Picture Setup Menu
The Picture Setup menu items are described below.
Thumbnail
A thumbnail is approximately 1/16 of the full screen display or 1/16 of the pane. It is
used to show the picture that is being measured in the pane or display. Up to four
thumbnails can be shown simultaneously. Each thumbnail can be for the same or
different input. When in quad mode (not full screen), the thumbnail will not be
displayed if one of the four panes has picture selected.
The thumbnail picture is shown in one corner of each Upper Left, Upper Right, Lower
Left, and Lower Right pane by using the THUMBNAIL menu. A sample quad-screen
display containing a thumbnail in the lower-right corner of the lower right pane is
shown in Figure 4-2.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-35
Global Setup Menu Functions
Figure 4-2. Sample Thumbnail Screen
Markers
There are three markers available to be indicated in the picture. Safe Action is equal to
90% of the picture height and 90% of the picture width. Safe Title is equal to 80% of
the picture height and 80% of the picture width. Clean Aperture shows the limits for
the active pixel area. Brackets appear on the picture or a box surrounds the picture to
show these limits. The center marker identifies the location of the center of the picture.
Closed Caption Display
The Closed Caption Display menu is used to determine the type of closed caption
display that should appear with the picture. The closed captions selections are CC1 to
CC4, T1 to T4, and 708 (which is HD only) Service 1 to 7. For more information on
Closed Captioning, see Closed Caption on page 3-45.
XDS
Located in the upper-left corner of the picture display is the Extended Data Services
(XDS) display when it is enabled in the PICTURE SETUP menu. The
Picture Setup/XDS menu is used to enable and disable XDS along with selecting the
information for line 6.
When XDS is selected, XDS data is decoded. There are five fixed lines (ID number,
Length of Time Elapsed, Program Name, Channel Info Network Name, and Content
Advisory), and one selectable line. Use the UP/DOWN NAVIGATION buttons to
select an item for the XDS.
The XDS selections are shown in Table 4-17. The bold items are always shown and
cannot be changed on the XDS display. All items are selectable for line 6 except
CHANNEL INFO NETWORK NAME. For more information on XDS see XDS on
page 3-69.
4-36
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
Table 4-17. XDS Line Selections
ID NUMBER
FUTURE CONTENT ADVISORY
PSIP STRUCTURE CONTROL
LENGTH ELAPSED TIME
FUTURE AUDIO SERVICES
PSIP EIT DESCRIPTOR
PROGRAM NAME
FUTURE CAPTION SERVICES
PSIP DATA CARRIAGE
CHANNEL INFO NETWORK NAME*
FUTURE COPY MANAGEMENT
CHANNEL INFO CALL
LETTERS
TYPE
FUTURE ASPECT RATIO
CHANNEL INFO TAPE DELAY
CONTENT ADVISORY
FUTURE COMPOSITE PACKET 1
CHANNEL INFO TSID
AUDIO SERVICES
FUTURE COMPOSITE PACKET 2
MISC TIME OF DAY
CAPTION SERVICES
FUTURE DESCRIPTION
MISC IMPULSE CAPTURE ID
COPY MANAGEMENT
PSIP MINOR CHANNEL
MISC SUPPLEMENTAL DATA
LOCATION
ASPECT RATIO
PSIP EVENT NUMBER
MISC TIME ZONE
COMPOSITE PACKET 1
PSIP EVENT START
OUT OF BAND CHANNEL
COMPOSITE PACKET 2
PSIP EVENT DURATION
CHANNEL MAP POINTER
DESCRIPTION
PSIP PROGRAM NAME
CHANNEL MAP HEADER
FUTURE ID NUMBER
PSIP PROGRAM TYPE
CHANNEL MAP PACKET
FUTURE LENGTH ELAPSED TIME
PSIP CONTENT ADVISORY
NATIONAL WEATHER SVC
CODE
FUTURE PROGRAM NAME
PSIP AUDIO SERVICES
NATIONAL WEATHER SVC
MSG
FUTURE TYPE
PSIP CAPTION SERVICES
-
*NOTE: Not available for Line 6 selection.
(Closed Caption) Size
The SIZE menu is used to select the size of the text of the closed caption display. The
selections are large (covers more of the displayed video signal) or small (covers less of
the displayed video signal).
Anamorphic
The Anamorphic menu selection is used to correct the anamorphic display. Setting the
menu selection to ON corrects the SD aspect ratio for the monitor.
Time Code
Time Code is the time that is associated with each video frame. Time Code is keyed
over the picture on the right side. Adjacent to the Time Code, the LTC/DVITC is
keyed over the picture on the right side when LTC/DVITC is selected. LTC/DVITC
cannot be activated unless ENABLE is selected. The submenu POSITION select is
used for the vertical placement of the time code at the top, bottom (beyond safe action
areas), and middle.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-37
Global Setup Menu Functions
Brightness
Picture Brightness is used to make the picture brightness lighter or darker. The
brightness range is from 25% (for the darkest picture) to 200% (for the brightest
picture). The default picture brightness is 100%.
Contrast
Picture Contrast is used to increase the overall difference between the lightest and
darkest colors. The contrast range is from 25% (for the least amount of difference
between the lightest and darkest colors) to 200% (for the most amount of difference
between the lightest and darkest colors). The default picture contrast is 100%.
(Picture) Color
Picture Color is used to change the picture to color or monochromatic (black and
white). The default menu item for Picture Color is Color.
Blue Gun
Blue Gun is a setup feature that is used to show the blue color component of the input
video. Use the Blue Gun feature to set the Saturation and Hue by matching the
intensity of all blue bars when a SMPTE split field color bar signal is applied.
Red Gun
Red Gun is a setup feature that is used to show the red color component of the input
video. Use the Red Gun feature to set the Saturation and Hue by matching the intensity
of all red bars when a SMPTE split field color bar signal is applied.
Green Gun
Green Gun is a setup feature that is used to show the green color component of the
input video. Use the Green Gun feature to set the Saturation and Hue by matching the
intensity of all green bars when a SMPTE split field color bar signal is applied.
VBI MASK
The VBI (Vertical Blanking Interval) MASK menu selection is used to mask closed
caption and non-active lines. With VBI MASK set to ON, only active lines will be
shown on the picture portion of the display.
Display Setup
The Display Setup menu is used to configure the Display colors, graticule and cursor
Intensity, XGA Freeze, and Monitor.
Display Colors
The display colors are used to select the colors for the background, cursors, signals,
and graticules of the VTM Series. The colors are listed in Table 4-13 on page 4-27.
The Display Color Selection Screen, shown in Figure 4-3, is used to set the colors.
4-38
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
Any color selection that is not available is blocked out and not accessible. “X”
indicates the selection on the screen.
Figure 4-3. Display Color Selection
Use the NAVIGATION buttons to select the cell for the color and function. Once
selected, press the ENT button to assign the color to that function. Though the same
color can be used for multiple functions, only one function can use one color. Black
cells in the Display Color Screen indicate color selections that can not be made for
specific functions.
NOTE: The background color is selectable. There is a 50% reduction in the luminance level of the
background relative to the same color of other attributes (e.g. text or graticules). This is to assure a
contrast when the background color selection is the same, such as red enabled alarms over a red
background.
Graticule Intensity
The Graticule Intensity submenu is used to raise or lower the brightness of the
displayed graticule.
Cursor Intensity
The Cursor Intensity submenu is used to raise or lower the brightness of the displayed
cursor.
XGA Freeze
The XGA Freeze Setup menu is used to determine the factors for when a display is
frozen.
Freeze From Clock
The Freeze Trigger From Clock is used to create a frame capture at a specified time.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-39
Global Setup Menu Functions
Freeze on Alarm
Freeze on Alarm is used to create a frame capture when one or more user-selectable
alarms are triggered. The FREEZE ON ALARM selections are used to automatically
or manually return the frozen picture to the active picture after a frame capture is
performed. Pressing the DISP button will override the FREEZE FROM CLOCK and
FREEZE ON ALARM menu selections.
•
If FREEZE ON ALARM is set to FIRST ALARM MANUAL RETURN TO LIVE
the frozen screen is immediately displayed when an alarm is triggered. The DISP
button must be pressed to return the screen to the active display.
•
If FREEZE ON ALARM is set to FIRST ALARM AUTO RETURN TO LIVE, the
active picture replaces the frame capture. No other captures are preformed.
•
If FREEZE ON ALARM is set to LAST ALARM AUTO RETURN TO LIVE, the
active picture replaces the latest frame capture. Frame captures for later alarms will
continue to override the previous capture.
Monitor
The monitor menu is used to select the aspect ratio, screen saver, and output level for
the monitor.
Aspect Ratio
The Aspect Ratio submenu is used to indicate to the VTM instrument the format of the
monitor that is utilizing the signal from the DVI OUT port. The menu selection should
always match the actual aspect ratio of the monitor. When the aspect ratio is correctly
set, the vector display graticule will appear round instead of oval.
Screen Saver
The screen saver is used to provide a blank screen after there is no activity for the
specified duration. The time it takes for the screen saver to activate can range from 1
to 60 minutes.
Output Level
The Output Level submenu is used to determine the monitor output level. The default
monitor output level is 1V p-p. The other output level selection is 0.7V p-p.
Communications Setup
The Communications Setup menu is used to configure the communication between the
VTM Series and any peripheral hardware and Software connected to the unit.
RCU Port
The RCU Port Submenu controls the termination and baud rate for the Remote Port on
the back of the VTM Series.
Termination
4-40
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
One RCU Series connects to multiple VTM Series instruments using a multidrop
straight through wire with RJ-11 connectors (not a standard telephone wire) that
connects to the REMOTE ports on the back of the VTMs and to the TO MAIN UNIT
connector on the back of the RCU. All VTMs must have unique unit IDs, as described
in Unit ID on page 4-44. The REMOTE port must be terminated on the last VTM
Series using this menu.
Baud Rate
The Baud Rate is used to set the baud rate for the REMOTE port. If the Baud Rate is
not correct, the VTM Series will not communicate with the device that is connected to
the REMOTE Port.
IP Configuration
The IP CONFIGURATION menu is used to configure the VTM Series for Ethernet
communication. The Ethernet interface provides a high-speed communication link to
the third party applications (such as SNMP) over standard LAN and Internet networks.
The interface conforms to industry Ethernet standards:
•
Connection via a standard RJ45 socket
•
Automatic detection and switching between 10BaseT and 100BaseT
•
SNMP Communications
•
TCP/IP stack is fully compliant with RFC2500, “Internet Official Protocol
Standards”
•
Fully compliant with IEEE 802.3 Ethernet standard
The interface can accept a static IP address, or it can obtain an IP address dynamically
from a DHCP server. The IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway Address, DHCP are
programmable from the Unit Ethernet Setup menu system. The settings are performed
in the IP Configuration screen.
IP Address
The IP Address is used to select a static IP address (unless Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) will be used). The IP address must not be the same
address as another instrument or PC on the network. Network conflicts will occur if
two devices have the same IP address. See the System Administrator to determine a
static IP address that will avoid conflicts.
Subnet Mask
The Subnet Mask is used to configure the Subnet Mask on a network if DHCP is not
enabled. If DHCP is not used to automatically detect the Subnet Mask on a network,
the Subnet Mask must be manually configured. Unlike the IP address, the Subnet
Mask must be the same Subnet Mask as the network Subnet Mask. See the System
Administrator to determine the Subnet Mask.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-41
Global Setup Menu Functions
Gateway
The Gateway is the network address that provides access to an outside network. Use
the Gateway submenu to configure the Gateway on a network if DHCP is not enabled.
If DHCP is not used to automatically detect the Gateway on a network, the Gateway
must be manually configured. Unlike the IP address, the Gateway must be the same
Gateway address as the network Gateway address. See the System Administrator to
determine the Gateway address.
DHCP
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) function is used to have the VTM
Series automatically configure an IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway every time
the unit is powered on. The IP Address is dynamic and could change each time the
VTM Series is powered on. DHCP Enable is set to OFF by default.
GPI Input Function and GPI Alarm Names
The input GPIs have selectable functions. There are selectable functions to allow
external control of the unit using the default settings. Another function of the GPI is to
show an onscreen alarm with a user-selected identification from an external input. The
user-selected identification can be renamed in the GPI ALARM NAMES window.
To change the GPI User Identification:
1. Press SETUP to display the SETUP MENU.
2. Use the NAVIGATION buttons to move the cursor to COMMUNICATIONS
SETUP menu.
3. Press the ENT button.
4. Use the NAVIGATION buttons to move the cursor to GPI ALARM NAMES.
5. Press the ENT button.
6. Use the NAVIGATION buttons to select the desired input (INPUT 1 to INPUT 9).
7. Press the ENT button. The GPI Rename Screen, shown in Figure 4-4, appears.
Figure 4-4. GPI Rename Screen
8. Use the RIGHT/LEFT NAVIGATION buttons to select character box.
9. Press the UP/DOWN NAVIGATION buttons to select a character. Use the
keyboard to insert a new name. A USB keyboard can be connected to the VTM to
perform this function.
10. Repeat until the name is complete.
11. Press the RIGHT or LEFT NAVIGATION buttons until ACCEPT is selected.
4-42
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
12. Press the ENT button over ACCEPT to accept the name, or CANCEL to not use
the changed name. Press the EXIT button at any time to cancel the name change
and return to the previous submenu.
GPI Output Function
The GPI Output Function submenu is used to determine the GPO Polarity and GPO
Output Setup for each input.
GPO Out 1 and 2 Polarity
There are two OUTPUT GPIs that are associated with a list of alarms. All GPI alarm
activation selections are set to the default OFF until the alarm is enabled. When an
alarm is enabled, the GPI functions according to the GPO OUT 1 and 2 POLARITY
setting (NORMALLY OPEN, NORMALLY CLOSED). The default polarity is
NORMALLY OPEN.
•
NORMALLY OPEN: The contact closure on the GPI board is normally open.
When the contact closure closes, the GPO alarm is activated.
•
NORMALLY CLOSED: The contact closure on the GPI board is normally
closed. When the contact closure opens, the GPO is activated.
GPO Out 1 and 2 Setup
The GPO Out 1 and 2 Setup submenu is used to select what input or alarm the GPO
follows. If an alarm occurs on an input associated with the GPO, the GPO will change
its polarity setting. If Follow Alarms is selected, the GPO will change its polarity
setting whenever an alarm occurs on any input.
GPI Alarm Reporting Setup
The GPI Alarm Reporting Setup menu accesses the GPI Alarm Reporting Matrix. In
the GPI Alarm Reporting Matrix select what functions each GPI Alarm (GPI Alarm 1
through 9) will trigger when an alarm is activated. Each alarm can be selected to
trigger one or more of the following: LOG, SOUND, SNMP TRAP, GPI OUT 1, GPI
OUT 2, FREEZE, and DATA CAPTURE.
Router Port
There is one RJ11 router control port located on the back panel. The port is used to
control Videotek RS series routers. The router can be switched manually or set to scan
all inputs. The router can be set to continuously scan selected inputs searching for
alarm conditions. All alarm conditions detected by the VTM Series will be logged on
the display (maximum 200 alarms), or a PC to produce a continuous log file.
Router control is accessed in the SETUP menu under COMMUNICATIONS\ROUTER
PORT. Under the Router Port menu are the following submenus:
•
INPUT SELECTION: Use to select which input (A, B, C, or D) the router scans.
•
CONFIGURATION: Use to DISABLE, ENABLED ROUTER, ENABLED
SCANNER. ENABLED ROUTER will allow manual control, and ENABLED
SCANNER will force the router to sequentially switch through all activated inputs.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-43
Global Setup Menu Functions
•
ROUTER MODE CHANNEL: Select the channel manually.
•
SCANNER MODE SEQUENCE: Selects which channels are enabled for scanner
mode.
•
DWELL TIME: Use to pause the router on each input for the selected time. Each
input of the router can also be given a unique name that will be placed in the log
file when an alarm is detected on that input.
•
CHANNEL NAMES: The inputs can be renamed by selecting using the Channel
Rename screen.
Unit ID
The unit ID is the identification number of the VTM Series. It can be set to any
number within a range of 1 to 99 and should be different than the identification
numbers of other units in the same system configuration.
System Setup Menu
The System Setup menu is used to control the system configuration selections.
Panel and Preset Lockout
The Panel Lockout feature is used to disable front panel control until the proper
password is entered. The Preset Lockout feature, located within the Panel Lockout
menu, is used to prevent storing settings in selected presets.
Similar to the Panel Lockout feature, the Preset Lockout is also password protected.
When a user locks a preset configuration into the VTM Series, it will not be able to be
altered until the password is entered. The Presets are locked and unlocked using the
Password screen, shown in Figure 4-5.
NOTE: The default password is 0-0-0.
Figure 4-5. Panel and Preset Lock/Unlock Screen
To lock or unlock the presets or front panel:
NOTE: Once Front Panel is selected to be locked out, the front panel is locked. Press the SETUP
button to enter the password to return to the Setup menu.
1. Press the SETUP button to display the SETUP MENU.
4-44
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
2. Use the NAVIGATION buttons to move the cursor to the SYSTEM menu.
3. Press the ENT button.
4. Use the NAVIGATION buttons to move the cursor to PANEL LOCKOUT.
5. Press the ENT button. The Enter Password screen appears.
6. Use the UP and DOWN NAVIGATION buttons to select 0-9 (first digit in
password).
7. Use the RIGHT NAVIGATION button to move the cursor to select the second
password number.
8. Use the UP and DOWN NAVIGATION buttons to select 0-9 (second digit in
password).
9. Use the RIGHT NAVIGATION buttons to move the cursor to the third password
number.
10. Use the UP and DOWN NAVIGATION buttons to select 0-9 (third digit in
password). When the password is correctly entered, LOCKED will change to
UNLOCK.
11. Use the RIGHT and LEFT NAVIGATION buttons to move the cursor to select
UNLOCK.
12. Press the ENT button.
13. Use the UP and DOWN NAVIGATION buttons to move the cursor to select the
Preset Number or front panel.
14. Press the ENT button to toggle between Lock and Unlock on the highlighted Preset
Number selection.
15. Repeat the previous two steps for any other selection needed to be made.
16. After the settings are complete, press the EXIT button to exit the menu.
(If the front panel was locked in the steps above) The front panel is locked once EXIT
is pressed. Any button pressed besides the SETUP button will invoke the PANEL
LOCKED OUT message. Subsequent presses of the SETUP button will invoke the
ENTER PASSWORD setup screen. The panel will be unlocked and the Setup menu
can only be accessed after a valid password has been entered.
To unlock the locked front panel:
NOTE: The default password is 0-0-0.
1. Press the SETUP button until the Enter Password Screen appears.
2. Use the UP and DOWN NAVIGATION buttons to select 0-9 (first digit in
password).
3. Use the RIGHT NAVIGATION button to move the cursor to the second password
number.
4. Use the UP and DOWN NAVIGATION buttons to select 0-9 (second digit in
password).
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-45
Global Setup Menu Functions
5. Use the RIGHT NAVIGATION button to move the cursor to the third password
number.
6. Use the UP and DOWN NAVIGATION buttons to select 0-9 (third digit in
password). When the password is correctly entered, LOCKED will change to
UNLOCK.
7. Press the RIGHT NAVIGATION button to select UNLOCK and press the ENT
button to unlock the front panel. Press EXIT at any time to keep the front panel
locked.
To change the password:
NOTE: The default password is 0-0-0.
1. Press the SETUP button to display the SETUP menu.
2. Use the NAVIGATION buttons to move the cursor to the COMMUNICATION
SETUP menu.
3. Press the ENT button.
4. Use the NAVIGATION buttons to move the cursor to CHANGE PASSWORD.
5. Press the ENT button. The Enter Password screen appears.
6. Use the UP and DOWN NAVIGATION buttons to select 0-9 (first digit in the
current password).
7. Use the RIGHT NAVIGATION button to move the cursor to the second password
number.
8. Use the UP and DOWN NAVIGATION buttons to select 0-9 (second digit in the
current password).
9. Use the RIGHT NAVIGATION button to select the third password number.
10. Use the UP and DOWN NAVIGATION buttons to move the cursor to select 0-9
(third digit in the current password). When the correct password is entered,
LOCKED changes to UNLOCK will appear.
11. Use the RIGHT and LEFT NAVIGATION buttons to move the cursor to
UNLOCK.
12. Press the ENT button. The Enter New Password screen appears. It is time to
ENTER A NEW PASSWORD.
13. Use the UP and DOWN NAVIGATION buttons to select 0-9 (first digit in the new
password).
14. Use the RIGHT NAVIGATION button to move the cursor to the second password
number.
15. Use the UP and DOWN NAVIGATION buttons to select 0-9 (second digit in the
new password).
16. Use the RIGHT NAVIGATION button to move the cursor to the third password
number.
17. Use the UP and DOWN NAVIGATION buttons to select 0-9 (third digit in the new
password).
4-46
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
18. Use the RIGHT NAVIGATION button to move the cursor to select ACCEPT.
19. Press the ENT button. The new password has been set.
Set Time
When selecting Set Time, the Enter New Time Screen, shown in Figure 4-6, appears.
The Enter New Time screen is used to set the internal clock of the unit. Press the UP
and DOWN NAVIGATION button to change the values of each time selection. Press
the RIGHT and LEFT NAVIGATION buttons to move between the Hour, Minute,
Second, Month, Day, Year, ACCEPT, and CANCEL selections. Once the internal date
and time is entered, press ENT when the accept button is highlighted to save the
settings.
Figure 4-6. Enter New Time Screen
Time Code Input
The Time Code Input is used to determine the Time Code for each format. The VTM
Series can read LTC (Longitudinal Time Code) and DVITC (Digital Vertical Interval
Time Code) based on the format selected. The Time Code Input menu has three
submenus:
•
ANALOG: reads LTC and VITC
•
SD: reads LTC and DVITC
•
HD: reads LTC, ANC LTC, and ANC DVITC
DVITC for HD/SD and VITC for NTSC and PAL are monitored on selected lines.
•
After DVITC is selected, adjust the line selection in the DVITC LINE 525 or
DVITC LINE 625 submenus to the selected line. The range for DVITC LINE 525
is adjustable from Line 10 to 20, and DVITC LINE 625 is adjustable from line 6
TO 22.
•
After VITC is selected, adjust the line selection in the VITC LINE NTSC or VITC
LINE PAL submenus to the selected line. The range for VITC LINE NTSC is
adjustable from Line 10 to 20, and VITC PAL is adjustable from line 6 TO 22.
For more information on displaying Time code see Time Code on page 4-37.
Aural Alert
Aural Alert is used to enable and disable the audible tone that originates from inside
the VTM Series. The Aural alert sounds when a minimum or maximum menu control
value is reached. The default Aural Alert setting is ON.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-47
Global Setup Menu Functions
Exit Bypass on Alarm
The Exit Bypass on alarm submenu is used to disable Bypass when an active alarm
occurs.
Control Illumination
The Control Illumination submenu is used to control the brightness of the front panel
button tally states.
Brightness
Set the brightness of the buttons in a low tally state using the Brightness submenu.
Contrast
The low tally state will never be brighter than the high tally state. The Contrast menu
was created to avoid this issue. The Contrast submenu is used to set the brightness of
the High Tally state. The brightness of the high tally state is determined by the contrast
and brightness of the low tally state.
Diagnostics (System Fault Log)
The System Fault Log, shown in Figure 4-7, is used to show the faults that occur
within the system.
Figure 4-7. System Fault Log
File Navigator
NOTE: The FILE NAVIGATOR menu item does not appear if a USB removable drive is not connected
to a USB port on the unit.
The File Navigator is used to control the presets and frame captures for the VTM
Series. Any stored preset or frame capture can be stored onto the USB removable
drive. Pressing the ENT button on the FILE MANAGER menu item access the File
Manager Screen, shown in Figure 4-8.
4-48
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Global Setup Menu Functions
Figure 4-8. File Navigator Screen
The left column of the File Navigator screen shows what is available to be transferred
to the USB drive. The stored presets are located in the PRESETS folder, and the frame
captures are located in the FRAME CAPTURE folder. Use the NAVIGATION
buttons to move among the folders and files. Press the ENT button to enter a folder.
When a preset or XGA capture is selected, press the ENT button to copy the file over
to the USB drive. When the ENT button is pressed, the Enter Name for Preset on USB
Drive Screen appears. Press the UP/DOWN navigation buttons to change the
character. Press the RIGHT/LEFT navigation buttons to move to the next character,
ACCEPT, or CANCEL. Once the file is renamed, select ACCEPT and press ENT to
copy the file to the USB drive. Press CANCEL to not copy the file. Pressing the EXIT
button also will not transfer the file to the USB drive.
The right column shows what is stored on the USB memory device. The stored
presets and XGA captures on the USB drive are shown in this column.
Flash from USB
NOTE: Presets are lost when performing a flash update. Ensure that the presets are saved on a USB
storage device before flashing.
NOTE 2: The menu item will not appear if a USB memory device is not installed. Disregard the
FAULT indication on the front panel during the flash update.
The FLASH FROM USB menu is used in coordination with a USB memory stick to
update the unit. Attach the USB stick into the front or back of the unit. Access the
SYSTEM\FLASH UPDATE FROM USB\PRESENT. Press the ENT button to
proceed into flash mode. Flash update status is shown with the line-by-line
programming and sector results. When complete, Flash Update Complete appears on
the screen. Cycle the power to continue normal operation.
About
The About Screen, shown in Figure 4-9, contains the model, serial number, module,
device, and version. Press the EXIT, SETUP, ENT, LEFT NAVIGATION BUTTON,
or press the LEFT/RIGHT CONTROL Knob to exit from the screen.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
4-49
Global Setup Menu Functions
Figure 4-9. About Screen
4-50
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Section 5 ♦ Alarm Descriptions
Setting Alarms
Most alarms monitor all lines of the video signal. The VITS alarm is an exception.
The VITS alarm is used to monitor activity or the lack of activity on a particular line.
The GAMUT alarm is more typical. The GAMUT alarm will monitor the entire active
picture for errors over the selected limits chosen on the menu.
Limits are selected in the SETUP Menu by choosing a value using the UP/DOWN or
CURVED ARROW knobs, or the UP or DOWN Navigation buttons while additionally
causing a limit cursor line to appear in the waveform or vector display. Do not confuse
these limit cursor lines with the cursor lines selected in the Cursor group on the front
panel. The limit cursor lines disappear when exiting the alarm menu.
Sensitivity and Duration are two general terms used in the alarm menus:
•
Sensitivity
Sensitivity is set by Consecutive Errored Samples (CES). When setting amplitude
limits, a noise spike can exceed the limit while the video amplitude can be within
the limit. With the CES set to a low number, a spike is detected and an alarm is
displayed. Set the CES to a higher number to ignore the fast spike. Each CES
occurs at 37ns intervals for SD and 13.5ns for HD. Use this as a guideline to select
the appropriate CES value.
Not all alarms have CES associated with them; in such cases, use the duration to
increase or decrease the general sensitivity.
•
Duration
This value is used to determine how long an error must persist before it is reported.
Set the duration to 0 to cause an error to be displayed as soon as the CES value is
met.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
5-1
Alarm Descriptions
Alarm Message Contents and Limitations
Figure 5-1. Sample Alarm Message (VTM Classic Mode Display)
Table 5-1. Description of Sample Alarm Message
Key
Description
1
Index number, from 1-200
2
Error type, which describes the alarm
3
Date and time (the internal clock setting in month/day/year and hour:minute:second)
4
Time code, which is from the LTC/CLOCK, VITC, or D-VITC (shown in
day:hour:minute:second:frame)
5
Duration, which is the length of time that the error occurred (shown in hour:minute:second)
6
Press the UP or DOWN NAVIGATION buttons to move up and down the alarm list.
When an alarm is first registered, it appears at the top of the alarm display area and is
yellow. If the alarm is short term (i.e., two seconds or less), the alarm text reverts to
the original graticule color after approximately two seconds. If the alarm continues
longer than two seconds, the text remains yellow and the alarm duration is
incremented. When the next alarm occurs, the previous alarm moves up one position.
The unit has enough memory for 200 alarms per input. When 200 different alarm
events have occurred, alarm number 200 is dropped and the most recent alarm is
tagged as 01.
Use the NAVIGATION UP and DOWN buttons to scroll through the alarm list. Press
and hold ENT to erase the current group of alarms. A GPI output dry-contact closure
can be used to alert other devices when an alarm occurs. Use the
COMMUNICATIONS menu to setup the GPI.
Video Alarms Digital Descriptions
The Video Alarms Digital menu contents are listed below.
Format Change
The Format Change alarm is used to indicate that the video format has been changed.
5-2
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Alarm Descriptions
Digital Gamut
RGB Upper/Lower
The RGB Upper and Lower alarm occurs when any component of the transcoded RGB
signal falls outside the upper or lower limits for a period in excess of the duration
setting. The Sensitivity can be increased to provide immunity to fast transcoding
spikes.
Lum Upper/Lower
The Luma Upper and Lower alarms scan the composite encoded signal derived from
the selected digital input. The alarms occur when the luminance video falls outside the
adjustable limits for a period in excess of the duration setting. The Sensitivity can be
increased to provide immunity to fast noise spikes.
Peak Upper/Lower
The Peak Upper and Lower alarms scan the composite encoded signal derived from the
selected digital input. The alarm occurs when the peak video falls outside the
adjustable limits for a period in excess of the duration setting. The Sensitivity can be
increased to provide immunity to fast noise spikes.
EDH – SD
Per SMPTE RP 165-1994; the EDH-SD alarm occurs when one or more errors are
detected for a period in excess of the duration setting (Standard definition only).
CRC HD
The CRC HD alarm occurs when the internally calculated CRC value is different from
the received CRC value (High definition only).
CRC Alarms
The following information is displayed when the CRC display is ON and an SD format
is detected:
DISPLAY
Time since Reset
DESCRIPTION
00:00:00
Hr:min:sec, elapsed time since last reset
FF
CRC
Seconds
value
Full field CRC error in seconds
AP
CRC
Seconds
value
Active Picture CRC error in seconds
F1
AP
CRC
value
CRC value (Check Sum) for active
picture, field one
F2
AP
CRC
value
CRC value (Check Sum) for active
picture, field two
Embedded Audio
value
Detects how many groups of audio are
available
Ancillary Data
Present
Detects other ancillary information
Format Errors
Detects a format error
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
5-3
Alarm Descriptions
The following information is displayed when the CRC display is ON and an HD format
is detected:
DISPLAY
Time since Reset
CRC
DESCRIPTION
00:00:00
Error Free
Hr:min:sec, elapsed time since last reset
value
Length of time in seconds CRC is error free
CHROMA
-
Embedded Audio
value
Detects how many groups of audio are
available
Ancillary Data
Present
Detects other ancillary Chroma information
LUMA
Ancillary Data
Present
Format Errors
Y
*
Detects ancillary Luma information
*
C
Detects a format error
*NOTE: Y=Luma and C=Chroma
The following are CRC Window Format Error types, which are further described in
Table 5-2, and are displayed under FORMAT ERRORS when they are detected:
•
SAV PLACED INCORRECTLY (sav)
•
LINE LENGTH ERROR (line length)
•
FIELD LENGTH ERROR (field length)
•
RESERVED VALUES USED IMPROPERLY (reserved values)
•
ANC DATA CHECKSUM ERROR (anc checksum)
•
ANC DATA PARITY ERROR (anc parity)
•
ANC DATA PLACEMENT ERROR (anc placement)
•
ABSENCE OF SERIAL VIDEO INPUT (no video)
Press the ENT button to reset the CRC elapsed time to zero and clear the EDH errors.
Table 5-2. CRC Alarm Error Types
Error Type
Description
CRC ERRORED
SECONDS
The integer number of seconds in which an EDH or CRC error has existed.
SAV PLACED
INCORRECTLY
SAV is relative to EAV. The number of words is a constant for any given
video format between EAV and SAV. EAV is detected and used as the
reference. The correct number of words is counted, and then SAV is
detected. The SAV Placed Incorrectly alarm occurs when a proper SAV
sequence is not detected or if SAV is detected before the correct number of
words between EAV and SAV.
LINE LENGTH
ERROR
The Line Length Error occurs when there are an incorrect number of words
between EAV and SAV.
FIELD LENGTH
ERROR
The number of lines is constant between the B bit going high and the start of
vertical blanking. The Field Length Error occurs when there is deviation in the
line number count.
(Table continues on next page)
5-4
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Alarm Descriptions
Table 5-2. CRC Alarm Error Types (continued)
Error Type
Description
RESERVED VALUES
USED IMPROPERLY
The Reserved Values Used Improperly alarm occurs when the eight most
significant bits (SD) or all ten bits (HD) are all “1” or “0” in any place other than
an EAV, SAV, or ancillary header.
ANCILLARY DATA
CHECKSUM ERROR
The Ancillary Data Checksum Error occurs when the internal calculated CRC
value is different from the received CRC value.
ANCILLARY DATA
PARITY ERROR
The Ancillary Data Parity Error occurs when the internal calculated CRC value
is different from the received CRC value.
ANCILLARY DATA
PLACEMENT ERROR
The Ancillary Data Placement Error occurs if an ancillary header appears
outside of blanking.
ABSENCE OF
SERIAL VIDEO INPUT
The Absence of Serial Video Input error occurs when the signal in the serial
video input is lost.
Loss of Carrier
The Loss of Carrier alarm occurs when there is no TRS (Timing Reference Signal)
detected.
Loss of Video
The Loss of Video occurs when active video falls below the adjustable threshold for a
period in excess of the duration setting.
Loss of Reference
The Loss of Reference alarm occurs when no sync signal is detected in the external
reference for a period in excess of the duration setting. To select the appropriate
external reference see Reference Selection on page 3-48.
Letterbox – SD
Letterbox is the top and bottom border surrounding the active video. The top border is
defined as having video below the threshold on the set line and having video above on
the following line. The bottom border is defined as having video above the threshold
on the previous line and video below the threshold on the set line. The Letterbox SD
alarm is activated when either the top line or the bottom line deviates from the user
settings (Standard definition only).
Pillarbox - HD
The PillarBox is the border to the right and left of the active video. The “End of Left
Border” and “Start of Right Border” defines the set points when the video is below the
threshold. If the video is outside of the threshold and CES values for the specified
duration, the Pillar Box HD alarm occurs (High definition only).
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
5-5
Alarm Descriptions
Picture Shift
The Picture Shift alarm activates when the luma portion of the video does not exceed
the amplitude threshold along any of the four borders of active video. The “Left/Right”
and “Top/Bottom” border settings define the tolerance of the Picture Shift alarm. If one
or more pixels are above the threshold for each of the four tolerance borders, no alarm
will be declared. For interlaced video formats Picture Shift checks the first field only.
For example, if a signal is 525/59.94 SDI video format, where “Left/Right” is set to 20
pixels, “Top/Bottom” is set to 4 lines, the threshold is set to 2 mV, and the “Duration”
is set to 2 seconds, the alarm will be activated if pixels 1 through 20 or 701 through
720, or lines 1 through 4, or 240 through 244 of active video do not exceed the 2 mV
threshold and exceeds the duration of 2 seconds.
Captioning
CC Not Detected – 608
The Closed Caption Not Detected 608 alarm is activated when the presence of
EIA/CEA-608-B closed caption data on line 21(284) with valid parity bits is not
detected for a period in excess of the duration setting.
CC Not Updating- 608
The Closed Caption Not Updating 608 alarm is activated when closed caption carrier is
present and the EIA/CEA-608-B data word on line 21 is null for a period in excess of
the duration setting.
CC Not Detected – 708
The Closed Caption Not Detected 708 alarm is activated when the presence of
EIA-708-B closed caption data with valid parity bits is not detected for a period in
excess of the duration setting.
CC Not Updating – 708
The Closed Caption Not Updating 708 alarm is activated when closed caption carrier is
present and the EIA -708-B data word is null for a period in excess of the duration
setting.
Teletext Not Detected – SD
The Teletext Not Detected SD alarm occurs when the presence of Teletext is not
detected for a period in excess of the duration setting.
Subtitle Not Detected
The Subtitle Not Detected alarm occurs when the presence of Subtitles is not detected
for a period in excess of the duration setting.
5-6
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Alarm Descriptions
Subtitle Not Updating
The Subtitle Not Updating alarm occurs when Subtitles carrier is present and the
subtitles are the same for a period in excess of the duration setting.
WSS (Widescreen Signaling) Not Detected
The Widescreen Signaling Not Detected alarm occurs when the presence of
Widescreen Signaling for Widescreen Format is not detected for a period in excess of
the duration setting.
XDS Not Detected
The XDS Not Detected alarm occurs when the presence of XDS is not detected for a
period in excess of the duration setting.
XDS Not Updating
The XDS Not Updating alarm occurs when XDS is present and the data word is the
same for a period in excess of the duration setting.
Eye Jitter
The Eye Jitter alarm occurs when the eye pattern jitter exceeds the threshold for a
period in excess of the duration setting.
Timing Alarm
The Timing Alarm occurs when the Time and Line range(s) are exceeded for a period
in excess of the duration setting.
Video Alarms Analog Descriptions
The Video Alarms Analog menu contents are listed below.
Loss of Signal
The Loss of Signal alarm occurs when no sync signal is detected for a period in excess
of the duration setting.
Loss of Reference
The Loss of reference alarm occurs when no sync signal is detected in the external
reference for a period in excess of the duration setting. To select the appropriate
external reference see Reference Selection on page 3-48.
Loss of Video
The Loss of Video occurs when active video falls below the adjustable threshold for a
period in excess of the duration setting.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
5-7
Alarm Descriptions
Analog Gamut
Peak Upper
The Peak Upper alarm occurs when active video falls outside the upper limit for a
period in excess of the duration setting. Peak video includes luminance and
chrominance.
Peak Lower
The Peak Lower alarm occurs when active video falls outside the lower limit for a
period in excess of the duration setting. Peak video includes luminance and
chrominance.
Luma Upper
The Luma Upper alarm occurs when the luminance portion of the active picture falls
outside the upper limit for a period in excess of the duration setting.
Luma Lower
The Luma Lower alarm occurs when the luminance portion of the active picture falls
outside the lower limit for a period in excess of the duration setting.
Sync and Burst
H (Horizontal) Sync Upper
The H Sync Upper alarm occurs when the horizontal sync pulse falls outside the upper
limit for a period in excess of the duration setting.
H (Horizontal) Sync Lower
The H Sync Lower alarm occurs when the horizontal sync pulse falls outside the lower
limit for a period in excess of the duration setting.
Burst Upper
The Burst Upper alarm occurs when the peak absolute value of burst falls outside the
upper limit for a period in excess of the duration setting.
Burst Lower
The Burst Lower alarm occurs when the peak absolute value of burst falls outside the
lower limit for a period in excess of the duration setting.
Burst to Chroma Phase
The Burst to Chroma Phase alarm occurs when the relative phase between burst and a
particular color on a selected line and location on the line exceeds a user-defined upper
and lower phase tolerance for a period in excess of the duration setting.
5-8
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Alarm Descriptions
For example, assume that the Vertical Interval Test Signal of color bars on line 17,
field 2 is selected. Also, assume the line position is set to monitor the blue color packet
with a range of 5° and duration of 0 seconds. If the phase error between burst and the
blue vector point exceeds ± 5°, an alarm occurs.
Horizontal Blanking (H Blanking)
The Horizontal Blanking (H Blanking) alarm occurs when the time interval between
the end of active video and the start of active video violates the specified limits for a
period in excess of the duration setting. The limits are:
•
NTSC: 10.7 to 11.1µs
•
PAL: 11.8 to 12.2µs
For this measurement to be accurate, active video must be higher than 20 IRE (NTSC)
or 350 mV (PAL).
Vertical Blanking
The Vertical Blanking alarm occurs if the number of lines during the vertical blanking
period violates the selected width limit for a period in excess of the duration setting.
The selectable widths are 20 Lines to 25 Lines for NTSC and 25 to 30 Lines for PAL.
SC/H Phase
The SC/H Phase alarm occurs when the phase angle of burst compared to the 50%
point of the leading edge of horizontal sync on line 10 of field 1 (NTSC) or line 1
(PAL) exceeds the range setting for a period in excess of the duration setting. The
range is ± 5° to 90° in NTSC and ± 5° to 45° in PAL.
VITS
The VITS alarm occurs when the selected lines become active or inactive as set by the
amplitude threshold for a period in excess of the duration setting. One or more lines
can be monitored, and they do not have to be successive. For example, line 17/E can be
monitored for activity over 50 IRE while line 20/O is monitored for inactivity under 50
IRE. The threshold and duration settings are global.
Captioning
Closed Caption Not Detected - Analog
The Closed Caption Not Detected alarm is activated when the presence of a closed
caption data word on line 21(284) with valid parity bits is not detected in a composite
signal for a period in excess of the duration setting.
Closed Caption Not Updating - Analog
The Closed Caption Not Updating alarm is activated when closed caption carrier is
present and the data word on line 21 is null in a composite signal for a period in excess
of the duration setting.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
5-9
Alarm Descriptions
Teletext Not Detected – Analog
The Teletext Not Detected - Analog alarm occurs when the presence of Teletext is not
detected for a period in excess of the duration setting.
Teletext Not Updating – Analog
The Teletext Not Updating - Analog alarm occurs when Teletext carrier is present and
the data word is the same for a period in excess of the duration setting.
XDS Not Detected – Analog
The XDS Not Detected - Analog alarm occurs when the presence of XDS is not
detected for a period in excess of the duration setting.
XDS Not Updating – Analog
The XDS Not Updating - Analog alarm occurs when XDS is present and the data word
is the same for a period in excess of the duration setting.
Time Code Alarm Descriptions
There are two type of Time Code Alarms: LTC and DVITC Time Code Alarms.
LTC Time Code Alarms
The LTC Time Code Alarms are listed below.
LTC Loss of Time Code
The Loss of Time Code alarm occurs when the peak-to-peak level of the LTC input
signal falls below an adjustable limit for a period in excess of the duration setting.
LTC Time Code Level
The Time Code Level alarm occurs when the peak-to-peak level of the LTC input
signal falls outside the user defined range limits for a period in excess of the duration
setting.
LTC Time Code Framing
The Time Code Framing alarm occurs when the alignment of the start of LTC
(ANSI/SMPTE 12M-1999) exceeds the range limit for a period in excess of the
duration setting.
LTC Time Code Continuity
The Time Code Continuity alarm occurs when a break or interruption in the time-code
count occurs.
5-10
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Alarm Descriptions
LTC/VITC Compare (TC Sync)
The LTC/VITC (TC Sync) alarm occurs when LTC and VITC are compared and differ
beyond the threshold (1 to 30 frames) selection for a period in excess of the duration
setting.
DVITC Time Code Alarm Error Types
The DVITC Time Code Alarms are listed below.
DVITC Loss of Time Code
The DVITC Loss of Time Code alarm occurs when no DVITC Time Code in the video
signal is detected for a period in excess of the duration setting.
DVITC Line
The DVITC Line alarm is used to select the line number on which the D-VITC time
code is detected for the “D-VITC Continuity” and “D-VITC CRC” fields. When time
code is not detected on the selected line number, the alarm activates.
DVITC Continuity
The DVITC Continuity alarm occurs when a break or interruption in the digital vertical
interval time code (VITC) frames occur for a period in excess of the duration setting.
DVITC CRC
The DVITC CRC alarm occurs when the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) within the
digital vertical interval time code field does not correlate with the embedded CRC for a
period in excess of the duration setting
TS Alarms Descriptions (VTM-OPT ASI)
The TS Alarms menu contents are listed below.
Alarm Reporting Setup
The TS Alarm Reporting Setup menu is used to accesses the Alarm Reporting Matrix.
In the Alarm Reporting Matrix select what functions each Alarm will trigger when an
alarm is activated. An alarm occurrence can trigger a log indication, sound, SNMP
trap, GPI OUT 1, GPI OUT 2, Freeze, and Data Capture.
Loss of Signal
The Loss of Signal alarm is activated when the signal carrier is not detected.
CRC Change
The CRC change alarm occurs when the selected table’s CRC information changes.
The selectable monitored tables are PAT, PMT, STT, MGT, VCT, RRT, EIT, and
ETT.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
5-11
Alarm Descriptions
ETR 290 1st Priority
The ETR 290 1st Priority menu contains the TS Sync Loss alarm, Sync Byte Error
alarm, PAT Error alarm, Continuity Count Error alarm, PMT Error alarm, and PID
Error alarm.
TS Sync Loss
The actual synchronization of the transport stream (TS) depends upon two things.
First, synchronization depends upon the number of correct sync bytes necessary for the
device to synchronize. Secondly, synchronization depends upon the number of
distorted sync bytes that the device cannot control. Five consecutive sync bytes should
be sufficient for sync acquisition, and two or more consecutive corrupted sync bytes
should indicate sync loss. The TS Sync Loss alarm activates when two or more
consecutive corrupted sync bytes occur for a period in excess of the duration setting.
Sync Byte Error
Sync Byte Error activates as soon as the correct sync byte (0x47) does not appear after
188 or 204 bytes. This structure is used throughout the channel encoder and decoder
chains for synchronization. Every sync byte is checked for correctness since the
encoders might not necessarily check the sync byte. Some encoders use the sync byte
flag signal on the parallel interface to control the randomizer re-seeding and byte
inversion without checking that the corresponding byte is a valid sync byte.
PAT Error
The PAT Error alarm activates when the PAT table is missing for a period in excess of
the duration setting.
Continuity Count Error
The Continuity Count Error alarm preconditions are “Incorrect Packet Order” and
“Lost Packet.” The preconditions could cause problems for the Integrated Receiver
Decoder (IRD), which is not equipped with additional buffer storage and intelligence.
It is not necessary for the test equipment to distinguish between these two
preconditions. The conditions are logically OR-ed together with the third precondition
into one indicator. “Packet Loss” shows that a packet loss can occur on any
asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) link, where one lost ATM packet would cause the
loss of a complete MPEG-2 packet. The precondition “a packet occurs more than
twice” could be symptomatic of a larger problem which the service provider should
keep under observation.
PMT Error
The PMT Error alarm occurs when there is no PMT and the corresponding program is
not decodable.
5-12
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Alarm Descriptions
PID Error
A Packet Identifier (PID) error occurs when a data stream for each PID is not identified
for a period in excess of the range setting. The error might occur where transport
streams are multiplexed, or demultiplexed and remultiplexed.
ETR 290 2nd Priority
The ETR 290 2nd Priority menu contains the Transport Error, CRC Error, PCR Error,
PCR Accuracy Error, PTS Error, and CAT Error alarm settings.
Transport Error
The Transport Error alarm activates when the indicator that is a resettable binary
counter counts erroneous transport stream packets. The counter is intended for
statistical evaluation of the errors. If an error occurs, no further error indication should
be derived from the erroneous packet. There can be value in providing a more detailed
breakdown of the erroneous packets. Two examples showing the value of providing a
more detailed breakdown of the erroneous packets are:
•
It provides a separate Transport Error counter for each program stream.
•
It includes the PID of each erroneous packet in a log of Transport Error events.
CRC Error
The Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) checks for the Program Access Table (PAT),
Conditional Access Table (CAT), Program Map Table (PMT), Service Description
Table (SDT), Network Information Table (NIT), Bouquet Association Table (BAT),
Time Offset Table (TOT), Event Information Table (EIT), System Time Table (STT),
Master Guide Table (MGT), Virtual Channel Table (VCT), Region Rating Table
(RRT), and the Extended Text Table (ETT). A CRC Error alarm indicates if the
content of any selected table is corrupted.
PCR Error
A Program Clock Reference (PCR) is used to re-generate the local 27 MHz system
clock. If the PCR does not have sufficient regularity, the clock can jitter or drift and
the receiver/decoder can become unlocked. When irregularities occur outside the PCR
Error ranges, the PCR Error alarm activates. In Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB), a
repetition period of not more than 40 ms is recommended.
PCR Accuracy
A PCR Accuracy Error occurs when the synthesized color falls outside the set range.
A PCR accuracy of ± 500 ns is intended to be sufficient for the color subcarrier to be
synthesized from the system clock.
PTS Error
Presentation time stamps (PTS) determine the time when a picture is shown on the
screen. A PTS Error occurs when PTS is not detected in a signal. The PTS should
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
5-13
Alarm Descriptions
occur at least every 700 ms. The PTS are only accessible if the transport stream is not
scrambled.
CAT Error
The Condition Access Table (CAT) is the pointer to enable the Integrated Receiver
Decoder (IRD) to find the Entitlement Management Message (EMM) associated with
the CA system(s) that it uses. If the CAT is not present, the receiver is not able to
receive management messages, and a CAT Error alarm activates.
ETR 290 3rd Priority
The ETR 290 3rd Priority menu contains the NIT Actual Error, NIT Other Error, SDT
Actual Error, SDT Other Error, EIT Actual Error. EIT Other Error, EIT PF Error,
Unreferenced PID Error, Repetition Error, Base PID Error, Buffer Errors, Empty
Buffer Error, and Data Delay Error alarms.
NIT Actual Error (DVB only)
The NIT Actual Error alarm activates for the following reasons:
•
The NIT Error occurs when the Network Information Table is not detected for the
set range.
•
The NIT Error occurs when two sections of the Table ID occur faster than the set
Short Range.
•
The NIT table contains an invalid ID. The NIT table IDs must contain a valid ID.
The IDs 0x40, 0x41, 0x72 must be present at PID (Packet Identifier) 0x0010.
NIT Other Error (DVB only)
The NIT Other Error alarm activates when Network Information Table sections with
the same number appear slower than the repetition rate.
SDT Actual Error (DVB only)
The SDT Actual Error alarm activates for the following reasons:
•
The SDT Error occurs when the Service Description Table is not detected for the
set range.
•
The SDT Error occurs when two sections of the Table ID occur faster than the set
Short Range.
•
The SDT table contains an invalid ID. The SDT table IDs must contain a valid ID.
The IDs 0x42, 0x46, 0x4A, and 0x72 must be present at PID 0x0011.
SDT Other Error (DVB only)
The SDT Other Error alarm activates when Service Description Table sections with the
same number appear slower than the repetition rate.
EIT Actual Error (DVB only)
The EIT Actual Error alarm activates for the following reasons:
5-14
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Alarm Descriptions
•
The EIT Error occurs when section zero (S0) or section one (S1) of the Event
Information Table is not detected for the set range. The range parameter is
independent for each section.
•
The EIT Error occurs when two sections of the Table ID occur faster than the set
Short Range.
•
The EIT table contains an invalid ID. The EIT table IDs must contain a valid ID.
The IDs 0x4E, 0x6F, or 0x72 must be present at PID 0x0012
EIT Other Error (DVB only)
The EIT Other Error alarm activates when Event Information Table sections (S0 or S1)
with the same number appear slower than the repetition rate. The range parameter is
independent for each section.
EIT PF Error (DVB only)
The EIT table contains two sub tables: section 0 (EIT-P) and section 1 (EIT-F). If one
sub table is present, then the other table must be present. The EIT PF Error alarm
occurs if section 0 (EIT-P) or section 1 (EIT-F) is missing.
Unreferenced PID Error
A PID is found in each packet and should be referenced in the PMT (Program Mat
Tables) or CAT (Conditional Access Table). The alarm activates when a PID that was
not referenced in the PMT or CAT occurs.
Repetition Error
The Repetition Error alarm occurs when one of the following tables falls outside the
maximum repetition rate or range: Running Status Table (RST), Time and Data Table
(TDT).
RST Enable and Repetition
The RST table activates the Repetition Error alarm when the appearance of the
Running Status Table falls outside the maximum repetition rate. Also, the RST table
IDs must contain a valid ID. The IDs 0x70 or 0x72 must be present at PID 0x0013.
The RST Error also occurs when the table ID is not a valid ID.
TDT Enable, TDT Short Range, and TDT Range
The TDT table activates the Repetition Error alarm for the following reasons:
•
The TDT Error occurs when the TDT is not detected for the set range.
•
The TDT Error occurs when two sections of the Table ID occur faster than the set
Short Range.
•
The TDT table contains an invalid ID. The TDT table IDs must contain a valid ID.
The IDs 0x70, 0x72, or 0x73 must be present at PID 0x0014.
MGT Range
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
5-15
Alarm Descriptions
The MGT table activates the Repetition Error alarm when the appearance of the Master
Guide Table falls below the minimum repetition rate.
STT Repetition
The STT table activates the Repetition Error alarm when the appearance of the System
Time Table falls below the minimum repetition rate.
RRT Repetition
The RRT table activates the Repetition Error alarm when the appearance of the Rating
Region Table falls below the minimum repetition rate.
VCT Repetition
The VCT table activates the Repetition Error alarm when the appearance of the Virtual
Channel Table falls below the minimum repetition rate.
EIT Repetition
The EIT Error alarm activates when the appearance of the Event Information Table
falls below the minimum repetition rate.
Base PID Error
The Base PID Error alarm occurs when a table other than the following tables appear at
PID 0x1FFB: MGT, CVCTR, TVCT, STT, DCCT, DCC-SCT, and/or RRT. The table
IDs associated with these tables are 0xC7, 0xCD, 0xC4, 0xC8, 0xC9, 0xD3, or 0xD4.
Buffer Errors
The Buffer Errors alarm occurs when an underflow or an overflow of buffers occur in
the MPEG-2 reference decoder for the selected program (PROGRAM 1 through 6).
The buffers are the Transport Buffer (TB), Transport Buffer System Buffer (TBSB),
Multiplexing Buffer (MBB), Elementary Stream Buffer (EBB), Main Buffer (BB), and
PSI Input Buffer (BSB).
Empty Buffer Error
The Empty Buffer Error occurs when the Transport Buffer is not empty at least once
per second.
Data Delay Error
The Data Delay Error occurs when the data through the TSTD buffer is delayed for
more than one second. Also, the Data Delay Error can occur when a delay in the data
through the TSTD occurs for more than one minute.
5-16
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Section 6 ♦ External Control
Using the Keyboard Commands
Table 6-1 lists the keyboard commands used for remote operation of a single VTM
Series or multiple VTM Series units with a USB keyboard connected.
Table 6-1. Keyboard Commands
Function
Keystroke
Description
Input
A, a
Selects INPUT A
Input
B, b
Selects INPUT B
Input
Alt+A
Selects INPUT A+B
Input
C, c
Selects INPUT C
Input
D, d
Selects INPUT D
Input
Alt+C
Selects INPUT C+D
Bypass
Ctrl+B
Toggles Bypass
EXT
X, x
Toggles Internal/External Reference
DISP
J, j
Toggles Frozen/Live Display
SDI
K, k
Toggles Frozen/Live data display
FULL
F, f
Toggles the selected quadrant full-screen/quad screen
MLT
M, m
Toggles Multi-mode/Normal-mode
UL
1
Selects the Upper Left Quadrant
UR
2
Selects the Upper Right Quadrant
LL
3
Selects the Lower Left Quadrant
LR
4
Selects the Lower Right Quadrant
WFM
W, w
Selects the Waveform display in the current quadrant
VECT
E, e
Selects the Vector display in the current quadrant
AUDIO
U, u
Selects the Audio display in the current quadrant
PICT
I, i
Selects the Picture display in the current quadrant
ALARM
9
Selects the Alarm display in the current quadrant
GAMUT
G, g
Selects the Gamut display in the current quadrant
TIMING
T, t
Selects the Gamut display in the current quadrant
EYE
Y, y
Selects the Eye display in the current quadrant
OPT
O, o
Selects the Option display in the current quadrant
H
H, h
Selects the Horizontal Sweep mode
V
V, v
Selects the Vertical Sweep mode
MAG
N, n
Changes the horizontal magnification
STEP
S, s
Steps through the available gain selections
(Table continues on next page)
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
6-1
External Control
Table 6-1. Keyboard Commands (continued)
Function
Keystroke
Description
VAR
Q, q
Toggles the variable gain mode
ZOOM
Z, z
Cycles through the Zoom modes
1
F1
Selects Preset 1
2
F2
Selects Preset 2
3
F3
Selects Preset 3
4
F4
Selects Preset 4
5
F5
Selects Preset 5
6
F6
Selects Preset 6
7
F7
Selects Preset 7
8
F8
Selects Preset 8
▲
↑
Up Navigation button
►
→
Right Navigation button
▼
↓
Down Navigation button
◄
←
Left Navigation button
ENT
Enter
Enter button
SETUP
Home
Toggle Setup mode
EXIT
End
Exit menu
LINE
L, l
Toggle Line Select
PHASE
P, p
Toggle Phase control
CURS
R, r
Cycle through Cursor control
Curved Arrow CW
>
Curved Arrow knob clockwise rotation
Curved Arrow CCW
<
Curved Arrow knob counter-clockwise rotation
Curved Arrow Push
/
Curved Arrow knob push
↕ CW
Page Up
Vertical knob clockwise rotation
↕ CCW
Page Down
Vertical knob counter-clockwise rotation
↕ Push
Insert
Vertical knob push
↔ CW
]
Horizontal knob clockwise rotation
↔ CCW
[
Horizontal knob counter-clockwise rotation
↔ Push
\
Horizontal knob push
Cold Start
Ctrl+Alt+Del
Cold Start
6-2
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
External Control
Mouse Operation
A Microsoft IntelliMouse® or a mouse that supports the Microsoft IntelliMouse
protocol can replace the keyboard for remote operation. In order to successfully
recognize the Microsoft IntelliMouse®, the mouse must be inserted into the USB port
of the VTM.
Once the mouse has been recognized by the VTM, the mouse can perform the
functions that are described in Table 6-2.
Table 6-2. Mouse Functions
Action
Function
When the Setup mode is inactive:
−
The initial click activates the virtual control menu structure.
−
After the virtual control menu structure is activated, subsequent
left click(s) will execute highlighted operations (with the
exception of memory operation and virtual knob movements).
Left click twice to execute a memory operation.
Left Click
When the Setup mode active, left clicking the mouse selects a
highlighted menu item.
Right Click
When the Setup menu is inactive, right click on the mouse to exit
from the virtual control panel function or exit one level from RECALL
FROM MEMORY or STORE INTO MEMORY.
When the Setup menu is active, press to exit one level in the menu.
When the Setup mode is inactive:
Thumb Wheel
−
If a virtual knob adjustment* is not selected, turn the wheel to
scroll through the available virtual control panel selections.
−
If a virtual knob adjustment* feature has been activated, turn the
wheel to adjust the associated knob function.
When the Setup mode is active, turn the wheel to scroll through the
menu items (like the UP/DOWN knob).
SpyderWeb II
The Videotek SpyderWeb II™ Unattended Networked Monitoring System is used to
monitor and control Videotek VTM/TVM series devices from a single PC at a local or
remote location. After the installation of a Videotek series device, the Ethernet port
can be connected directly to the Ethernet port of a PC.
SpyderWeb II has three basic functions:
•
Remote control of the VTM/TVM
•
Gather and organize alarm information generated by VTM/TVM
•
Initiate, display, and transfer frame captures from the VTM/TVM
SpyderWeb II uses a network connection for monitoring and control of up to 30
VTM/TVM series units. The SpyderWeb II program runs cooperatively with other
®
Windows programs. It runs “in the background” of a PC using a Windows operating
system, allowing use of the PC for other tasks. SpyderWeb II alarms the user of any
problems detected in any of the connected VTMs/TVMs.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
6-3
External Control
Browser Interface
The website for each unit is accessed by pointing the web browser at the VTM/TVM IP
address. Before the default web screen appears, a password must be entered to access
the instrument. Each password allows specific privileges. The following passwords
are case-sensitive:
•
VTMUser: Allows read-only access to the instrument
•
VTMSystem: Allows read/write access to instrument
•
VTMAdmin: Allows read/write access to instrument.
Once the password has been entered, the default web page (the ABOUT Screen), is the
first screen that appears. The screen indicates the model number, version, serial
number, and what is installed in each slot of the instrument.
A sample Web Remote Display is shown in Figure 6-1, and described in Table 6-4.
The screen is split into two sections. The sections are the Tab/Tab details section and
the Web RCU section.
Figure 6-1. Sample Web Remote Display
6-4
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
External Control
Tab/Tab Details
Clicking the Tab at the top of the screen will link to the appropriate tab page, as shown
in the example in Figure 6-1. Table 6-3 describes the fields shown in the Tab/Tab
Details section.
Table 6-3. Tab/Tab Details Description
Key
1
Field
WEB FUNCTION TABS
Click the Tab to access the appropriate Tab page for the
specified tab function.
ABOUT
The ABOUT tab is a read-only screen that contains the
Firmware Version, VPR ID, Slot 1 ID, Slot 2 ID, Audio ID,
Display firmware version, Panel version, RCU version, and
serial number information. This is similar to the ABOUT
screen described on page 4-49.
GPIO
The GPIO tab displays the GPI Alarm Rename screen. All 9
GPI Alarm names can be changed on this screen. There is a
16-character limit for each GPI Alarm Name. This screen is
similar to the section on GPI Input Function and GPI Alarm
Names on page 4-42.
SYSTEM
The System Screen is used to rename the Input Source IDs
and indicate the number of current monitored alarms. The
Input Source ID is described on page 4-31.
2
3
4
The number of current monitored alarms field is a read-only
display that indicates the number of active alarms for the
selected input. This field does not indicate the alarms for all
the inputs at the same time.
TIMECODE ALARMS
The Time Code Alarms Screen indicates the Alarm Enable
and Parameter Settings field for each Time Code Alarm. The
Enable Field is set with a “0” for Disable Alarm or a “1” for
Enable Alarm. See Table 4-10 on page 4-21 for the list of
alarm parameters.
ANALOG ALARMS
The Analog Alarms Screen indicates the Alarm Enable and
Parameter Settings field for each Analog Video Alarm. The
Enable Field is set with a “0” for Disable Alarm or a “1” for
Enable Alarm. See Table 4-9 on page 4-15 for the list of
alarm parameters.
DIGITAL ALARMS
The Analog Alarms Screen indicates the Alarm Enable and
Parameter Settings field for each Digital Video Alarm. The
Enable Field is set with a “0” for Disable Alarm or a “1” for
Enable Alarm. See Table 4-8 on page 4-10 for the list of
alarm parameters.
AUDIO ALARMS
The Audio Alarms Screen indicates the Alarm Enable and
Parameter Settings field for each Audio Alarm. The Enable
Field is set with a “0” for Disable Alarm or a “1” for Enable
Alarm. See the A3-OPT 3, A3-OPT 4, A3-OPT 5, and A3-4004
Installation and Operation Handbook for the complete list of
audio alarms for the selected option.
TAB PAGE
Lists all the fields associated with the selected tab. To see the
latest values of the instrument for the selected TAB PAGE
press the F5 button to refresh the screen.
5
6
7
8
9
Description
(Table continues on next page)
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
6-5
External Control
Table 6-3. Tab/Tab Details Description (continued)
Key
Field
SAVE Button
The SAVE button is used to save the changed parameter
values for the selected field. The SAVE button will not be
enabled for any field until the field parameter changes. Once
the SAVE button is enabled, click the SAVE button to save the
changes.
VALUE CHANGE
INDICATION
Shown as VALUE SAVED or COULD NOT SAVE VALUE.
This appears after the SAVE button is pressed. It will remain
on the screen until another tab or the refresh button (F5) is
pressed.
10
11
Description
Web RCU
The Web RCU is located at the bottom of the screen, as shown in Figure 6-1.
Table 6-4 describes the fields shown in the Tab/Tab Details section.
The button colors in the Web RCU section provide the following indications on the
status of the instrument:
•
WHITE: The button is in use (similar to the high tally indication on the front
panel).
•
BLUE: The button is not in use (similar to low tally indications on the front
panel).
Table 6-4. Web Remote Display Description
Key
Field
WEB RCU (Virtual
Control Panel)
The WEB RCU is the virtual front panel controls for the
VTM/TVM instrument. All the buttons relate to specific buttons
on the front panel. There are some slight differences to the
WEB RCU that differ from the actual front panel of the
instrument. Those differences are listed below.
A+B, C+D Buttons
Press to select INPUT A and B or INPUT C and D
simultaneously.
HOLD Button
Some functions of the VTM/TVM instrument require that
certain buttons need to be pressed and held. Because
buttons on the virtual control panel cannot be physically
pressed and held, the HOLD button on the Virtual Control
Panel is used to hold the next selected button.
1
2
3
CURVED (Arrow)
BUTTONS
4
Description
Pressing the RIGHT ARROW button is similar to turning
the CURVED ARROW knob to the right (up).
Pressing the LEFT ARROW button is similar to turning
the CURVED ARROW knob to the left (down).
Pressing the PUSH button is similar to pressing the
CURVED ARROW knob to perform the selected knob
function according to the menu or pane selected.
(Table continues on next page)
6-6
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
External Control
Table 6-4. Web Remote Display Description (continued)
Key
Field
Description
Pressing the UP ARROW button is similar to turning the
RIGHT/LEFT KNOB to the right (right).
HORIZONTAL
BUTTONS
Pressing the DOWN ARROW button is similar to turning
the RIGHT/LEFT knob to the left (left).
5
Pressing the PUSH button is similar to pressing the
RIGHT/LEFT knob to perform the selected knob function
according to the menu or pane selected.
Pressing the RIGHT ARROW button is similar to turning
the UP/DOWN knob to the right (up).
VERTICAL BUTTONS
Pressing the LEFT ARROW button is similar to turning
the UP/DOWN knob to the left (down).
6
Pressing the PUSH button is similar to pressing the
UP/DOWN knob to perform the selected knob function
according to the menu or pane selected.
7
FAULT BUTTON
The fault button is used to indicate when a fault occurs in the
VTM/TVM instrument. Pressing this button has no effect.
SNMP Communications
A Management Information Base (MIB) is an object database that can be monitored by
a Network Management System (NMS). The protocol standardized for communicating
MIB objects between an Agent and a Network Management System is the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
An object in the Videotek VTM Series MIB represents each VTM Series parameter
and status, and each object can be referred to by a numeric designation called an Object
ID (OID). The root OID (Enterprise ID) for Videotek MIBs is 1.3.6.1.4.1.10039. The
full MIB tree is:
iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).private(4).enterprises(1).10039.videotekMIB(1).vtRelease(10).vtVTMSeries(1)
Additionally, the VTM Series supports SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c traps. The VTM
Series MIB branch is called vtVTMSeries. The VTM Series MIB can be found on the
SNMP Support CD that is supplied with the instrument.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
6-7
External Control
Blank Page
6-8
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Section 7 ♦ Troubleshooting
CAUTION — these instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To reduce
the risk of electric shock, do not perform this installation or any servicing unless you
are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
NOTE: When power is applied to the unit, the display shows the startup screen for about 45 seconds.
If the VTM Series is not functioning properly, first verify that:
•
The VTM Series is connected to a power source (90–264 VAC, 50/60 Hz nominal).
•
All cables are correctly connected (see Section 2, “Installation”).
Initial difficulties with operation or display can be due to improper setup. Review the
SETUP MENU (see Section 3, “Operation”) to ensure that the proper adjustments have
been made for the signal requirements.
Cold Starting the VTM Series
NOTE: A cold start resets all front panel and Setup menu selections to the factory-default settings. All
user settings are lost. See Section 3, “Operation,” for the factory-default settings.
If a problem persists after the cables are correctly connected and the unit is set up,
perform a Cold Start. Two procedures can cold start the VTM Series. Only one
procedure needs to be performed to cold start the unit. The first type of cold start
procedure is a front panel Cold Start, as described below. The second type of cold start
procedure is a Warm Start that is described on page 7-2. The third type of cold start is
a Cold Start after a VFlash update that is described on page 7-2.
The Ethernet default settings for the VTM Series are:
•
IP: 192.0.0.100
•
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.192
•
Gateway: 0.0.0.0
Cold Start
The Front Panel Cold Start procedure is a cold starting procedure that does not require
the power to be disconnected from the unit. To perform a Front Panel Cold Start:
1. Push and hold the SETUP button, UP/DOWN knob, and RIGHT/LEFT knob. For a
minimum of five seconds. The Cold Start message appears on the screen.
2. Once the message appears, the cold start is complete.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
7-1
Troubleshooting
Warm Start
The Warm Start procedure is similar to a cold start. This reset will perform a cold start
on the unit, but will not erase the Presets from memory. To perform a Warm Start:
1. Push and hold the SETUP button and CURVED ARROW knob for a minimum of
five seconds until the Warm Start message appears on the display.
2. Once the message appears, the Warm start is complete.
Cold Start after VFlash
After a VFlash update is performed, cycle the power and perform a cold start to
continue. To perform a Cold Start after a VFlash update:
1. Unplug the power to the TVM/VTM device and wait 30 seconds.
2. Plug the power back into the device while pushing and holding the SETUP button,
UP/DOWN knob, and RIGHT/LEFT knob. Hold the buttons until the display
appears.
3. Once the quad display appears, the cold start is complete.
Problems, Causes, and Solutions
Table 7-1. VTM Series: Problems, Causes, and Solutions
Problem/Symptom
Possible Cause
No display on external XGA
monitor
Solution or Explanation
The monitor is not powered up.
Check to see that the monitor is
plugged in and powered up.
The full-screen picture display is
selected but no signal is present
on the input selected.
Press DISPLAY to de-select the
full-screen picture display.
Display on External XGA
monitor is not centered
The XGA monitor is not correctly
adjusted.
Use the monitor controls to center
the display.
Waveform not locked when
External Reference
(EXT REF) is selected
The video signal is too low in
amplitude or the sync edge is too
noisy.
Verify that the External Reference
signal is of sufficient amplitude.
EXT REF is selected but there is
Select Internal Reference (INT
no reference input, or the External REF) and/or verify that the
Reference is non-synchronous.
External Reference signal is
synchronous.
Problems displaying HD or
SD inputs
Inputs not terminated.
Terminate Inputs
(Table continues on next page)
7-2
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Troubleshooting
Table 7-1. VTM Series: Problems, Causes, and Solutions (continued)
Problem/Symptom
Possible Cause
Waveform not locked when
External Reference
(EXT REF) is selected (cont)
External Reference inputs are not
connected properly for the
configuration.
Solution or Explanation
Check that the external reference
configuration is in the expected
mode (Loop or Split).
If in loop mode, there should only
be one input signal. If in split
mode, the Blackburst signal should
be applied to the REF A input,
while a Tri Level signal should be
applied to the REF B input.
Audio level reading too low
The input reference level is not
correctly set.
Use the SETUP MENU to check
the input reference level setting.
When displaying an A&B or
C&D parade, the second
display is not locked or is
offset
Eye Pattern not clear
The two signals are not
genlocked or are not timed.
Genlock or time the signals.
There is excessive cable length.
Add digital DA to cable run.
Add reclocking DA to cable run.
There is excessive jitter.
Source is causing jitter.
Picture width not correct
The aspect ratio is not set
correctly.
Change aspect ratio in the setup
menu.
Input switches by itself
The router control is on.
Turn off router control in the setup
menu.
No communications on
remote (RCU) port
No communications on
Ethernet port
The baud rate is not correct.
Select the proper RCU baud rate.
The IP address is incorrect.
Provide the correct IP address in
setup menu.
Incorrect Ethernet cable.
For a direct connection, use a
crossover cable. For a network
connection, use a standard
Ethernet cable.
If the problem still exists after troubleshooting the VTM Series, see Section 1, “Service
Support,” for further instructions.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
7-3
Troubleshooting
Blank Page
7-4
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Appendix A ♦ Specifications
Video
Inputs A and B (Digital)
Two (2) dual standards inputs accepting Standard definition, SMPTE
259 M-C formats or High definition SMPTE 292M, 372M formats
including: 525/59.94, 625/50, 1080i/60, 1080i/59.94, 1080i/50,
1080p/30, 1080p/29.97, 1080p/25, 1080p/24, 1080p/23.98,
108p0/30sF, 1080p/29.97sF, 1080p/25sF, 1080p/24sF, 1080p/23.98sF,
720p/60, 720p/59.94, 720p/50, 720p/30, 720p/29.97, 720p/24 Hz,
720p/23.98, Format Standard Dual Link SMPTR 372M 4 color 44
(YCBCR) 10 bit
Data Rate
270 MB/s, 1.485 GB/s, auto detect
Connectors
4 BNCs, Hi-Z passive looping
Level
800 mV, nominal
Input EQ
Up to 100 meters of 8281 at 1.485 GB/s
Up to 250 meters of 8281 at 270 MB/S
Return Loss
Inputs C and D (Option):
(Analog)
≤ -15 dB 5 MHz to 1.485 GHz
Two (2) NTSC/PAL composite video auto detect
Signal Level
1V p-p
Input Impedance
Hi-Z, looping
Return Loss
≤ -45 dB 100 MHz to 5 MHz
(SD-SDI)
Two (2) SMPTE 259M-C inputs, auto detect 525/59.94 and 625/50
Input Impedance
Hi-Z looping
Return Loss
≤ -25 dB 100 kHz to 270 MHz
(HD/SD-SDI)
Reference
See Input A and B
Analog Blackburst, NTSC/PAL composite video, Tri-level sync auto
detect per SMPTE 274M
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
A-1
Specifications
Video (continued)
286 mV p-p ± 6 dB (Blackburst NTSC)
Levels
300 mV p-p ± 6 dB (PAL sync and burst)
600 mV p-p ± 3 dB (Tri level Sync)
Impedance
Selectable Hi-Z looping or 75Ω terminating
Connectors
BNC
SDI monitor output
Follows the selected digital input
Data Rate
270 MB/s and 1.485 GB/s
Connector
BNC
Level
800 mV, nominal
DVI-I Output
Digital Levels
Per DDWG DVI rev 1
R, G, B Levels
Selectable 0.7 or 1V p-p, nominal
Pixel Rate
65 Mp/s
Analog R,G,B Impedance
75Ω
Horizontal Sync
Negative TTL pulse @ 48,363 Hz ± 1%
Vertical Sync
Negative TTL pulse @ 60.004 Hz ± 1%
Display Accuracy
± 1% waveform
± 1° vector
± 37 nS Timing Digital
± 300 nS Timing Analog
Connector
29-pin DVI-I, female
Audio Options
Inputs (Analog)
Eight monophonic or four stereo channels, balanced or unbalanced
Maximum Input Level
+24 dBu
A-2
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Specifications
Audio Options (continued)
Input Connector
37-pin, D-sub, male
Impedance:
> 20kΩ
Inputs (Digital)
Four AES/EBU serial digital pairs with input expansion option to eight.
Sixteen embedded audio channels, one Dolby® E or AC-3 stream
Input Connectors
Four or eight, BNC, female
Impedance
75Ω
Outputs (Analog)
Eight monophonic or four stereo channels, balanced or unbalanced,
follows selected audio input. Dolby inputs produce a two channel mix
down and/or full eight channel decode
Output level
+24 dBu max
+6 to –50 dB adjustable
For digital audio, -20 dBFs produces a +4 dBu analog output level
Output connector
37-pin D-sub, male, shared with inputs
Impedance
10Ω unbalanced or 20Ω balanced, nominal
Signal to noise
100 dB (relative to signal level out of +24 dBu), typical
Outputs (Digital)
®
®
4 AES/EBU and one Dolby Digital, Dolby E stream
Output connector
Four shared with input
Impedance
75Ω, BNC, female
Control
GPI
Nine total with four input and five preset recall selections or individually
user configured
GPO
Two alarms, user configured
Connector
26-pin HD (high density) D-sub, female
Input Impedance
10 kΩ returned to +5 VDC
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
A-3
Specifications
Control (continued)
Alarm Output
Relay closure
Maximum relay current
350 mA @ 30 VDC
External router control
One RJ-11 female, for use with Videotek RS-12 series routers
Remote
One RJ-11 female for use with the RCU-100
Peripheral interface
USB 1.1 supporting storage devices, mouse, and keyboard
Connector
USB 1.1, Type A, female
Display
General
A quadrant display for viewing an input on up to four different displays
as picture, waveform, vector, audio, alarm status, timing, optional eye
pattern, simultaneously or individually as a full screen display of each
separately. Additional data analyzer display for pixel analysis. Also,
view multiple waveform and vectors of the same or different inputs.
Waveform
Composite. YCBCR or RGB, parade/overlay of like formats
1H or 2H with x1, x5, and x10 horizontal magnification
Sweep time base
1V or 2V with x1, x5, and x25 horizontal magnification
Waveform accuracy
≤ 1%
Eye (optional)
Display Eye or waveform individually or paraded
Sweep time base
Overlay or 10 Eye (SD), 20 Eye (HD)
Filters
10, 100 Hz, 1 kHz
Vector
R-Y vs. B-Y for Analog CB vs. CR for HD or SD
Vector Accuracy
≤ 1°
Gamut
Encoded or RGB gamut displays with upper and lower limit selection
Audio (Optional)
2, 4, 6, or 8 channels displayed simultaneously
A-4
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Specifications
Time Code
LTC via back panel connector
Input
Ancillary Time Code (HD only)
DVITC extracted from SD inputs
Displayed directly
Display
Used to set internal clock
Eye Pattern
SD: 3 eye or 10 eye
Display Types
HD: 3 eye or 20 eye
10 Hz ± 2 Hz at the -3 dB point of the jitter response
Jitter High Pass Filters
100 Hz ± 10 Hz at the -3 dB point of the jitter response
1 kHz ± 100 Hz at the -3 dB point of the jitter response
≤ 20% for all jitter frequencies up to 300 kHz
Jitter Overshoot
250 kHz to 2250 MHz
Measurement Analog
Bandwidth
-3 to +1 dB relative to 750 MHz
Amplitude Display Accuracy
Intrinsic Jitter
± 5%
≤ 70 ps for HD
≤ 150 ps for SD
Intrinsic Wander
≤ 150 ps for HD
≤ 300 ps for HD
Lock-up Time
Horizontal Mag
≤ 1 second
x1 - SD/HD = 3 eye displayed
- SD = 10 eyes displayed
- HD = 20 eyes displayed
x5 - SD/HD = 3/5 eye displayed
- SD = 2 eyes displayed
- HD = 4 eyes displayed
x10 - SD/HD = 3/10 eye displayed
- SD = 1 eye displayed
- HD = 2 eyes displayed
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
A-5
Specifications
Eye Pattern (continued)
Eye display input
Displays pre-equalized waveforms
Jitter Display
Display type
Bar graph showing jitter magnitude
Jitter display range
0 UI to 1.0 UI
Bandwidth
Jitter display follows selected eye pattern high pass filter select (10 Hz,
100 Hz, or 1 kHz)
Display location
Always displayed when eye pattern is selected except when EYE line
select is enabled, and always selects whatever input is being shown
with the eye pattern.
SDI Freeze
Waveform
Freeze-capable displays
Vector
Picture
Data
Display differentiation method
Frozen waveform and vector can be set to a different color than live. All
inputs (Inputs A, B, C, D) can each have a different color, and the
frozen waveform and vector can be a third color.
Menu selections: waveform, vector, and picture
Freeze Triggers
Alarm: data
Waveform and vector frozen
displays
Display frozen
Display live
Display both
Picture Displays
Display frozen
Display live
Frozen Waveform Control
The following can be altered on a frozen waveform:
Field select (odd or even)
H Mag
V Mag
H pos
V pos
All sweep and filter settings
A-6
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Specifications
Data Analyzer
Data: Four-word (maximum) display of samples of a particular line.
Displays
Pixel: Three word – Y, CB, CR display of a particular picture
element
Three modes to display Pixel Data (Pixels within the Pixel cursor):
(a) 2H: displays 2 horizontal pixels
(b) 8H: displays 8 horizontal pixels
(c) 2H x 4V: displays 2 horizontal pixels and 4 vertical pixels
Front Panel selects what to display.
Control
Line Select knob selects a line.
UP/DOWN buttons choose which samples/pixel to display
Alarms can trigger data freeze.
Interaction with Alarms
Peak (Upper and Lower), Luminance (Upper and Lower), and RGB
Gamut cause errored samples to be highlighted.
CRC Error Display
Display position
Replaces alarm window
Display enable
By menu choice
Parameters displayed
FF CRC Sec (full-field CRC errored seconds- SD only)
AP CRC Sec (active picture CRC errored seconds – SD only)
F1 AP CRC Value – displays the most recent active picture CRC
for field 1 (SD only)
F2 AP CRC Value – displays the most recent active picture CRC
for field 2 (SD only)
Format Errors
Time since last reset
Embedded audio presence
Other ancillary data presence
Format errors monitored
SAV placed incorrectly
Line-length error
Field-length error
Reserved values used improperly
ANC data checksum error
ANC data parity error
ANC data placement error
Absence of serial video input
CRC error-specific controls
Errored second counter rest
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
A-7
Specifications
Closed Captioning Displays
Standards
SD: Implements the digitized form of line 21 analog closed
captioning (EIA-608B)
HD: Implements vertical ancillary captioning (EIA-708B)
Data types supported
CC1: primary
CC3: secondary
708: Digital television caption service (HD only)
Gamut Display
Monitored parameters
Composite gamut (positive and negative chroma packet excursions
about luma levels)
RGB gamut
Display type
Polar. Angle of display always represents hue (as in a
vectorscope).
Composite display amplitude plots luma plus half of saturation and
luma minus half of saturation, with magnitude in IRE or units.
Concentric circles represent minimum and maximum ranges.
Component display plots R, G, and B amplitudes, with magnitude
in mV. Concentric circles represent minimum and maximum
ranges.
Magnification
Waveform Sweep MAG
selection
x1, x5, and x10. Pressing the MAG button will cycle through x1, x5,
and x10 horizontal magnification.
Waveform Step Gain
selection
x1, x2.5, x5, and x15. Pressing the STEP button will cycle through x1,
x2.5, x5, and x15 vertical magnification.
Waveform Gain
Variable from x0.50 to x15.00.
Vector Gain
Variable: x0.50 to x50.00 in .01 steps.
A-8
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Specifications
Ethernet
Standard
10/100 Base-T conforms to IEEE802.3
Connector
RJ-45
Performance metric
Transfer a captured frame to a PC in ≤ 30 seconds, dedicated LAN
Number of simultaneous
connections
6
External Routing Control
Switcher protocol
RS-12X
Number of RS-XX
One
Physical interconnection
standard
RS-485
Remote Control
Communications
VCP
Number of multidrop inputs
10
Physical interconnection
standard
RS-422
Power Requirements
AC power source
90 – 264 VAC, 50 - 60 Hz, nominal
Power consumption
150 VA maximum
Mechanical
Dimensions
Weight
Height:
1.75" (4.45 cm)
Width:
19.00" (48.26 cm)
Depth:
20.00" (50.80 cm)
11 lb (4.98 kg)
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
A-9
Specifications
Environmental
Operating temperature
0° to +50°C
Storage temperature
-40° to +65°C
Humidity
0 to 90% (non-condensing)
Transportation
24" (9.5 cm) impact-drop survivable in original factory packaging
Standard Accessories
Standard accessories
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Breakout connector for GPI/TALLY/LTC/CLOCK
One Rack Mounting Kit
One Power Cord
DVI to VGA adaptor
Console
VTM-ASX
VTM Console that included chassis, power supply, cooling system fans,
system controller, front panel controls with USB port, and back panel
connections for Ethernet, USB port, one router and remote control port,
and LTC/GPI interface. Supports 1 graphics display driver, 1 or 2 video
boards, and 1 audio board. A graphics display engine module
(VTM-OPT 10 or VTM-OPT 40 and at least one input module are
required to operate the console.
Display Drivers
VTM-OPT 10
Graphics display engine that affords 100% digital signal processing and
instrument display capability of one input source at a time.
VTM-OPT 40
Graphics display engine that affords 100% digital signal processing and
instrument display capability of four input sources simultaneously.
VTM Audio Options (Supports One)
A3-OPT 2
Advanced Audio Analysis Option. Bargraphs and CineSound®. View
up to 8 audio channels. Includes 4 analog stereo inputs, 4 AES/EBU
shared input/output pairs and 16 channels of embedded audio. Analog
monitoring outputs of up to 8 channels simultaneously.
A3-OPT 3
Advanced Audio Analysis Option. Bargraphs and CineSound®. View
up to 8 audio channels. Includes 4 analog stereo inputs, 8 AES/EBU
inputs with 4 shared output and 16 channels of embedded audio.
Analog monitoring outputs of up to 8 channels simultaneously.
A-10
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Specifications
VTM Audio Options (Supports One) (cont)
A3-OPT 4
Adds Dolby decoding to mix down analog output to A3-OPT 3.
A3-OPT 5
Add full Dolby decoding with up to 8 analog outputs to A3-OPT4
A3-4004
Audio Expansion module. Adds 4 AES/EBU input pairs. Only available
with A3-OPT 2.
Video Input Options
TVM-OPT AAP
Advanced Analysis Package that adds data analyzer functions in
quadrant or full-screen views to the VTM Series.
VTM-OPT ASI
Two (2) passive-looping DVB-ASI and SMPTE310 inputs. It accepts
two independent MPEG streams and analyzes one selected stream for
compliance to measurement guidelines of ETSI TR-101-290 (ETR-290)
first, second, and third priority standards.
VTM-OPT HD/SD
Two (2) passive looping SMPTE 292M (HD-SDI) and SMPTE 259M-C
(SD-SDI) inputs, auto detect, line select, internal and blackburst
references.
VTM-OPT SD
Two (2) passive looping SMPTE 259M-C (SD-SDI) inputs, auto detect
and line select
VTM-ACV-2
Dual composite analog input module. Add two composite analog
passive looping inputs (NTSC or PAL) with auto-detection and line
select.
VTM-OPT EYE-1
Two (2) active looping SMPTE 259M-C (SD-SDI) inputs, auto detect
with EYE pattern and monitor output. Factory installation required,
replaces standard A and B inputs.
VTM-OPT EYE-2
Two (2) active looping SMPTE 292M (HD-SDI) inputs, auto detect with
EYE pattern and monitor output.
Other Options
RCU-1000
Remote control panel for the VTM series, TVM-900 series, and
TVM-800 series instruments. Replicates all of the front panel controls.
RS-422 connection, includes 50’ (15m) cable with RJ-11 connectors.
One RU in height.
TVM-WRTY2
Adds three years to the standard two-year warranty.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
A-11
Specifications
Blank Page
A-12
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Appendix B ♦ Pinouts
Figure B-1. ANALOG AUDIO IN/OUT 37-pin, Male, D-sub Connector For Audio Options
Table B-1. Pinouts for ANALOG AUDIO IN/OUT Connector and Audio Breakout Board
Pinout
Signal
Pinout
Signal
1
Analog input 1 –
20
Analog input 1 +
2
Analog input 2 –
21
Analog input 2 +
3
Analog input 3 –
22
Analog input 3 +
Analog input 4 +
4
GND
23
5
Analog input 4 –
24
Analog input 5 +
6
Analog input 5 –
25
Analog input 6 +
7
Analog input 6 –
26
GND
Analog input 7 –
27
Analog input 7 +
Analog input 8 +
8
9
Analog input 8 –
28
10
GND
29
Analog output 1 +
11
Analog output 1 –
30
Analog output 2 +
12
Analog output 2 –
31
Analog output 3 +
Analog output 3 –
32
Analog output 4 +
Analog output 5 +
13
14
Analog output 4 –
33
15
Analog output 5 –
34
Analog output 6 +
16
Analog output 6 –
35
Analog output 7 +
17
Analog output 7 –
36
Analog output 8 +
18
Analog output 8 –
37
GND
19
GND
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
B-1
Pinouts
Figure B-2. DVI-I In/Out Connector
Table B-2. Pinouts for DVI-I In/Out Connector
Pinout
Signal
Pinout
1
T.M.D.S. Data 2-
9
2
T.M.D.S. Data
2+
10
3
T.M.D.S. Data
2/4 Shield
11
T.M.D.S. Data 1/3
Shield
19
T.M.D.S. Data 0/5
Shield
4
T.M.D.S. Data 4-
12
T.M.D.S. Data 3-
20
T.M.D.S. Data 5-
5
T.M.D.S. Data
4+
13
6
DDC Clock
14
DDC Data
7
15
Signal
T.M.D.S. Data 1T.M.D.S. Data 1+
T.M.D.S. Data 3+
+5V Power
Ground (return for
+5V, Hsync, and
Vsync)
Analog Vertical
Sync
16
C1
Analog Red
C2
Analog Green
C4
Analog
Horizontal Sync
C5
Analog Ground
(analog, R, G, and
B return)
8
B-2
Hot Plug Detect
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Pinout
17
18
21
22
Signal
T.M.D.S. Data 0T.M.D.S. Data 0+
T.M.D.S. Data 5+
T.M.D.S Clock
Shield
T.M.D.S. Clock+
23
24
C3
T.M.D.S. ClockAnalog Blue
-
-
Pinouts
Figure B-3. LTC/GPI 26-pin, Female, D-sub Connector
Figure B-4. LTC/GPI Breakout Board
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
B-3
Pinouts
Table B-3. Pinouts for LTC/GPI Connector and LTC/GPI Breakout Board
Pinout
Signal
Pinout
Signal
1
GND
14
Return for GPI #1
2
GPI input #4 (Select input D)
15
GPI output #2
3
GPI input #3 (Select input C)
16
Return for GPI #2
4
GPI input #2 (Select input B)
17
Reserved
5
GPI input #1 (Select input A)
18
Reserved
6
GPI input #7 (Select Preset 3)
19
Clock high in
7
GPI input #8 (Select Preset 4)
20
Clock low in
8
GPI input #9 (Select Preset 5)
21
Reserved
9
GPI input #6 (Select Preset 2)
22
Reserved
10
GPI input #5 (Select Preset 1)
23
Reserved
11
GND
24
LTC high in
12
Reserved
25
LTC ground
13
GPI output #1
26
LTC low in
B-4
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Pinouts
Figure B-5. Remote RJ-11 Control Connector
Table B-4. Remote RJ-11 Control Connector Pinouts
Pinout
Signal
VTM Series
RCU1000
1
OPEN
Open
GND
2
RX -
Received by VTM Series
Transmit from RCU
3
RX +
Received by VTM Series
Transmit from RCU
4
TX -
Transmit from VTM Series
Received by RCU
5
TX +
Transmit from VTM Series
Received by RCU
6
GND
GND
GND
Figure B-6. Router RJ-11 Control Connector
Table B-5. Router RJ-11 Control Connector Pinouts
Pinout
Signal
1
OPEN
2
OPEN
3
TX
4
RX
5
OPEN
6
GND
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
B-5
Pinouts
Figure B-7. Ethernet RJ-45 Connector
Table B-6. ETHERNET RJ-45 Connector Pinouts
Pinout
Signal
Pinout
Signal
1
TX+
5
N.C.
2
TX-
6
RX-
3
RX+
7
N.C.
4
N.C.
8
N.C.
Figure B-8. USB Connector
Table B-7. USB Connector Pinouts
Pinout
Signal
1
VCC
2
Data -
3
Data +
4
GND
5
GND
6
GND
B-6
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Appendix C ♦ Glossary
601 An international standard (ITU-R BT.601) for component digital television. It
defines the sampling systems, matrix values, and filter characteristics for digital
television.
8 VSB Vestigial sideband modulation with 8 discrete amplitude levels.
16 VSB Vestigial sideband modulation with 16 discrete amplitude levels.
Advanced Television Systems Committee (ATSC) The parent organization that
developed, tested and described the form and function of the US digital television
formats.
AES/EBU A digital audio standard established jointly by the Audio Engineering
Society (AES) and the European Broadcasting Union (EBU).
Artifacts Unwanted visible effects in the picture created by disturbances in the
transmission or image processing, such as edge crawl or ‘hanging dots’ in analog
pictures or ‘pixelation’ in digital pictures.
Aspect Ratio The ratio of horizontal to vertical dimensions. A square has an aspect
of 1:1 since the horizontal and vertical measurements are always equal. Current
television screen aspect ratios are 4:3 and 16:9.
Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) A transmission method adopted by the
DVB, and called DVB-ASI. The transmission method allows for the transport of
varying data payloads in a constant data stream. The DVB-ASI transport stream rate is
270 Mb/s.
Audio Breakaway Routing video and accompanying audio in separate signal paths.
Audio-Follow Routing video and accompanying audio together in the same signal
path.
Auto Trans Automatic transition. The execution of a single wipe or fade from current
picture to another picture by way of an automatic device.
Bandwidth The range of frequencies used to transmit information such as picture and
sound.
Baseband Video An unmodulated video signal.
Black Also color black, blackburst. A composite color video signal that has the
composite sync, reference burst, and a black video signal.
Blanking Processor A circuit which removes sync, burst and blanking from the
program video and then replaces it with sync, burst and blanking from the reference
input. The process ensures constant sync and burst levels on program video.
Border An electronically-generated picture member which is used in wipes to separate
the two video sources used in the wipe. It is of even thickness and has color produced
by the matte generator.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
C-1
Glossary
Broadcast Legal Encoding video signal parameters to conform to prescribed limits
for broadcast. Encoding rules vary by NTSC, PAL, country and broadcast facility.
BTSC Broadcast Television Standards Committee. A US standard for stereo audio
encoding in NTSC broadcast television.
CAV Component Analog Video
CES Consecutive Errored Samples
Composite Video A single video signal that includes all color video and timing
information. A composite signal includes luminance, chrominance, blanking pulses,
sync pulses and color burst information.
Chrominance The color portion of a video signal that represents the saturation and
hue. Black, gray and white have no chrominance; color signals have both chrominance
and luminance.
CH Chroma
Chrominance/Luminance Delay (C/L Delay) A measurement that indicates the
amount to which chrominance and luminance are aligned with respect to each other. A
low C/L delay figure can minimize the effects of ghosts or color offset on the received
picture.
Clipping The electronic process of shearing off the peaks of either the white or black
excursions of a video signal for limiting purposes. Clipping is often performed prior to
modulation to limit the signal.
CMRR Common Mode Rejection Ratio
Color Burst The portion of a color video signal which contains a short sample of the
color subcarrier. It is used as a color synchronization signal to establish a reference for
the color information following it and is used by a color monitor to decode the color
portion of a video signal. The color burst acts as both amplitude and phase reference
for color hue and intensity. The color oscillator of a color television receiver is phase
locked to the color burst.
Composite Sync A signal consisting of horizontal sync pulses, vertical sync pulses
and equalizing pulses only.
CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check
Crosspoint An electronic switch, usually controlled by a button on the panel. Control
logic will allow for only one crosspoint, for each bus, to be switched "ON" on at a
time.
D/A Conversion of digital to analog signals.
DA Distribution Amplifier
Data Element An item of data as represented before encoding and after decoding.
Decoded Stream The decoded reconstruction of a compressed bit stream.
Decibel (dB) A logarithmic measure of the ratio between two powers, voltages,
currents, sound intensities, etc. Signal-to-noise ratios are expressed in decibels.
C-2
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Glossary
Default A factory preset value or condition.
Demodulator A receiver, such as for television broadcast, cable, and closed circuit
applications. A TV demodulator receives and processes off-air or cable RF signals and
provides baseband video and audio outputs.
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Differential Gain A measurement that specifies how much the chrominance gain is
affected by the luminance level. Expressed as a percentage showing the largest
amplitude change between any two levels, it indicates how much color saturation
variance occurs when the luminance level changes.
Differential Phase A peak-to-peak measurement that specifies the extent to which
the chrominance phase is affected by the luminance level. Expressed in degrees of
subcarrier phase, it indicates how much hue shift occurs with luminance level changes.
Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) A specific project office of the European
Broadcast Union. This group has produced a set of digital broadcasting standards.
DSK Down Stream Key, a keyer which is electronically located after (or down stream
from) all other functions of a switcher. The key resulting will appear to be on top of all
other pictures from the switcher.
D-VITC Digital Vertical Interval Time Code. Timecode information stored on specific
lines in the vertical blanking interval of a television signal.
EAV End of Active Video in component digital systems.
EBU European Broadcasting Union
Editor A device or system which controls video tape recorders, video switchers, and
other related devices in order to electronically splice segments of recorded video into a
finished production.
EDH Error Detection and Handling. A recommended practice defined in SMPTE RP
165. A system to generate and then detect video data errors in serial digital video
systems.
Effects Keyer A keyer which is electronically located in the mix/wipe generator
portion of a switcher. The resulting key would appear under the down stream key.
EIA Rack Space or Unit A specific size as designated by the Electronics Industry
Association. The rack unit is 19 inches wide, and is 1.75 inches tall. A device which
requires 3 EIA rack units is 19 inches wide and 5.25 inches (3x1.75 = 5.25) tall.
Elementary Stream (ES) A generic term for one of the coded video, audio or other
variable length bit streams which are packetized to form MPEG-2 transport streams.
Consists of compressed data from a single source (audio, video, data, etc.). One
elementary stream is carried in a sequence of PES packets with one and only one
stream ID.
Embedded Audio Digital audio information multiplexed onto a serial digital data
stream. Up to sixteen channels can be multiplexed on a single stream of 601 video,
minimizing cabling and routing requirement.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
C-3
Glossary
ENG Electronic News Gathering
Encoded Clip Softness In the encoded legalization process, “softness,” as applied
to encoded clips, refers to the processing of the video at the point of the clip. The clips
are applied in YCBCR color space. The clip point is either an immediate limit (no
softness) or will have a range of values leading to the clip point, all reduced to smooth
the clip point to a less immediate limit (softness).
Encoded Legalization Limiting of the luminance and color difference signals such
that, once encoded into a composite video signal, the resultant encoded video does not
violate the maximum or minimum signal levels as defined by the specific encoding
rules. NTSC and PAL video plus various users of these types of video have many
varied rules for maximum and minimum encoding limits. Encoded legalization usually
calculates first the encoded luminance value and then the corresponding chroma value
to make legalization judgements.
Encoded Video A combined single video signal that is constructed from either
separate RGB or luminance and two color difference video signals. NTSC, PAL, and
SECAM are all examples of encoded video.
Envelope Detection An RF signal detection technique that does not respond to
phase variations in the carrier signal, enabling measurement of a transmitter’s
incidental phase. When used together with synchronous detection, envelope detection
helps isolate either video and/or RF as the causes of phase distortion.
External Key Input This is an alternate source for key cut. This is usually a separate
external input to a switcher
Fade-thru-Black A production technique which is a two step process. The first step
will fade the program video to black. The second step will fade from black to the video
selected on the preview bus. This is usually used in major scene transitions.
Fade-to-Black A production technique which simply fades the program video to
black and program audio to silent. This is used to end programs and to escape from
embarrassing pictures or sounds.
Field A picture or picture portion which is produced within one cycle of vertical
synchronization. In interlaced systems, a full picture or frame requires two consecutive
fields.
FM Trap A circuit designed to minimize potential interference from strong FM signals
in receiving equipment, such as a TV demodulator. For example, an FM trap can
attenuate signals between 88-108 MHz to reduce interference on NTSC television
channel 6.
Frame A single full resolution picture as viewed in either a video or film system. In
the case of interlaced video, two consecutive fields provide all of the information of
one frame. In non-interlaced systems, one cycle of vertical synchronization produces a
frame. A 60 Hz interlaced system, produces 30 frames of video in one second. A 60 Hz
progressive (or non-interlaced) system, produces 60 frames of video in one second.
Common frame rates are 24 (film) 25, 29.97, 30, 50, 59.94 and 60.
Frame Synchronizer An electronic device that synchronizes two or more video
signals. Using one input as a reference, it locks a second signal to the reference.
C-4
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Glossary
Frame Store An electronic method of capturing and storing a single frame of video.
Gamma This term applies to the linearity of the change from black to white. Gamma
controls adjust the gray or 50% point of the video either up or down, with the effect of
changing the gray level of the video.
Gamut The whole or total of whatever is being addressed. In color space, gamut refers
to all colors which are included in a particularly defined color group, such as 601
gamut.
Genlock (Generator Lock) A method of synchronization involving the generation
of a video signal that is time and phase locked with another signal.
GPI General Purpose Interface
Headend In a cable TV system, the facilities where program sources (satellite,
terrestrial, VTR, local) are received and remodulated for distribution through a cable
plant.
High Definition Television (HDTV) High definition television has a resolution of
approximately twice that of conventional television in both the horizontal (H) and
vertical (V) dimensions and a picture aspect ratio (H to V) of 16:9.
High Level A range of allowed picture parameters defined by the MPEG-2 video
coding specification which corresponds to high definition television.
HRC Harmonically-Related Carrier
Hue Color tint
ICPM Incidental Carrier Phase Modulation. A measurement of picture carrier phase
distortion (affected by the video signal level) that occurs in the transmitter.
IP Internet Protocol
IRC Incrementally-Related Carrier
I.R.E. Refers to the Institute of Radio Engineers, and is used as a unit of measurement.
In NTSC television, 1 volt of signal equals 140 IRE units.
ISP Internet Service Provider
Jitter A deformation of a signal affected by poor synchronization.
Key An effect in television where a selected portion of background video is removed
and replaced with another video.
Key Cut In a key effect, this is the video which designates the portion of background
video which is removed.
Key Fill In a key effect, this is the video which is used to replace the portion of
background video which was removed. This may be the same video as the Key Cut
video.
Key Invert In a key effect, this is an electronic action which reverses the polarity of
the key cut signal. It makes black appear as white, and white appear as black.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
C-5
Glossary
Key Mask In a key effect, it uses a wipe pattern from the wipe pattern generator to
restrict the key cut from removing video in a portion of the screen. This requires the
use of the wipe pattern generator and the Mask/Preset Size controls.
Key Source Another term which is the same as key cut.
Legalization The modification of serial digital video to conform to analog color
space rules, as required by users.
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light-Emitting Diode
LFE Low Frequency Effects
Lissajous A display of the amplitude and phase relationships between two input
signals.
LS Left Surround
LTC Longitudinal Time Code, A SMPTE timecode standard usually recorded onto the
linear audio track of a VTR.
Luminance The degree of brightness (black and white portion of the video signal) at
any given point in the video image. A video signal is comprised of luminance,
chrominance and sync. If luminance is high, the picture is bright and if low the picture
is dark. Changing the chrominance does not affect the brightness of the picture.
Main Level A range of allowed picture parameters defined by the MPEG-2 video
coding specification with maximum resolution equivalent to standard definition
television.
Main Profile A subset of the syntax of the MPEG-2 video coding specification that is
supported over a large range of applications. Applications include, MP@HL (Main
profile at high level) and MP@ML (Main profile at main level).
Mask/Preset Size Uses the wipe pattern generator in the keyer portion of the effects
generator. This is used to adjust the size of a preset pattern or for adjusting the size of a
mask to block a portion of the key cut (source) from use in the keyer.
Matte Generator An internal generator which can make any color, is used for border
color and may be used for key fill. It is identical to the Color Background Generator,
but simply used in other areas of the switcher.
Mbps Megabits Per Second
mV Millivolts
M/E Mix/Effects System
MP@HL Main profile at high level
MP@ML Main profile at main level
MPEG Refers to standards developed by the ISO/IEC JTC1/SC29 WG11, Moving
Picture Experts Group.
MPEG-2 Refers to ISO/IEC standards 13818-1 (Systems), 13818-2 (Video), 13818-3
(Audio), and 13818-4 (Compliance).
C-6
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Glossary
Multi-Level Effects Applies to any effects generator which can do more than one
effect at a time. Typically, a multi level switcher can produce a Key and a Background
transition in the same effects generator at one time.
NTSC National Television Systems Committee, the color television system used in the
United States, Canada, Mexico and Japan.
NVRAM Nonvolatile RAM
Packet Identifier (PID) A unique integer value used to associate elementary streams
of a program in a single or multi-program transport stream.
Packet A packet consists of a header followed by a number of contiguous bytes from
an elementary data stream. It is a layer in the system coding syntax.
Packetized Elementary Stream (PES) The data structure used to carry elementary
stream data. The packets consist of a header followed by payload data, and a stream is
a series of packets which form an elementary stream and have a single stream
identification.
PAL Phase Alternation Line; the standard color television system in many European
and other countries.
Passive Looping Video and audio signals routed through components, even if power
is removed. Signals are not amplified or processed, maintaining transparency.
Pedestal Level An offset used in a video system to separate the active video from the
blanking level by maintaining the black level above the blanking level by a small
amount.
Pixel A Picture cell or Picture element representing one sample of picture information,
such as an individual sample of R, G, B, luminance or chrominance.
Preset Refers to establishing any condition prior to use on the Program output. This
term is used in reference to wipe patterns and is often interchanged with Preview.
Preview The video output channel used to view the intended Program results prior to
the execution of the next transition.
PRO Audio A transmitted audio channel for talent cueing via Interrupt Foldback
(IFB) to ENG vans and remote applications. Some demodulators support PRO audio
monitoring.
Program A transport stream combination of a video stream and one or more audio
and data streams associated with that video stream. In analog terms, “Program” refers
to the Base Band video and audio produced by the final output of a switcher.
Program Association Table (PAT) A list of all programs that are in the ATSC
data stream.
Program Map Table (PMT) A listing of all elementary streams that comprise a
complete (television) program.
Program Clock Reference (PCR) This is a time reference signal that is placed in
MPEG streams for the purpose of time coordinating various data streams.
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
C-7
Glossary
Program and System Information Protocol (PSIP) Information sent out as part
of an ATSC transport stream which lists all of the video, audio, data and program
information contained in the stream. This is the "TV guide" for a given stream.
Progressive Scanning Also non-interlaced. A system of video scanning where
lines of a picture are transmitted consecutively, such as with VGA monitor displays.
Push-push Toggle Switch An electro-mechanical device which, when pushed,
alternates the condition of the switch. Push once, it's off, push again, it's on.
Quadrature Output An output in a television demodulator used for measuring
Incidental Carrier Phase Modulation (ICPM) in a transmitter.
QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying, typically used by satellite downlinks.
QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation, the technique used by cable TV systems (64QAM and 256-QAM) to remodulate signals for distribution in a cable plant.
RGB Legalization Limiting of luminance and color difference video signals such
that, once transcoded into RGB component video signals, the resultant video does not
violate the maximum or minimum signal levels as defined by component video level
rules. Typically, the maximum value for R, G, or B is 700 mV, and the absolute
minimum value for any of these signals is 0 mV.
Reclocking The process of regenerating digital data with a clock recovered from the
input data.
Resolution A measure of the finest detail that can be seen, or resolved, in a
reproduced image.
RS Right Surround
RS-422 Recommended Standard number 422, an E.I.A. standard which describes a
type of data interchange. Television products use this standard as its communication
format between the electronics frame and editors, control panel and computers. An
RS-422 line may be extended up to 1,000 feet (304m).
Sampling Process by which an analog signal is sampled to convert the analog signal
to digital.
SAP Secondary Audio Program, used in television broadcast for second language
broadcasting, simulcasting, and separate audio programming.
Saturation Color intensity
SAW Filter Surface Acoustic Wave filter
Segment Error Rate (SER) A calculated average of uncorrected transport stream
packets vs. total packets as accumulated over a designated period of time.
Signal to Noise Ratio -Analog (SNR) A measurement of the noise level in a signal
expressed in dB (decibels) as a ratio of between the audio or video signal’s maximum
peak-to-peak signal voltage and the measured voltage of noise present when the signal
is removed. Higher SNR figures indicate that any noise introduced by system
components will not be perceived in the picture and sound output signals.
C-8
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Glossary
Signal to Noise Ratio-8VSB (SNR) As applies to 8VSB transmissions, this is a
calculated average power of the ideal signal divided by the actual demodulated signal
power.
SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers
Standard Definition Television (SDTV) This term is used to signify a digital
television system in which the quality is approximately equivalent to that of NTSC.
This equivalent quality may be achieved from pictures originated at the 4:2:2 level of
ITU-R BT.601 and subjected to processing as part of the bit rate compression. The
results should be such that when judged across a representative sample of program
material, subjective equivalence with NTSC is achieved. The displayed picture may be
either the traditional 4:3 or the wide-screen 16:9 aspect ratio.
STL Studio Transmitter Link
Synchronous Detection A common detection technique used in television
demodulators that removes quadrature distortion, enabling comparison of transmitter
output with video input signal.
S-Video Also Y/C. Transmits luminance and color portions separately via multiple
wires, thus avoiding the color encoding process and resulting loss of picture quality.
Tally A system used to light lamps and indicate usage. Most production switchers have
an internal tally system to indicate selected functions, and which selected functions are
currently involved with Program.
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
Telecine A device used to convert film to video; movie film is digitally sampled and
converted to video frame by frame in real-time.
TCXO Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator
THD Total Harmonic Distortion
Transport Stream-ATSC (TS) Consists of the following: (1) Packets: 188 bytes fixed length with descriptive data, (2) Carries several programs, (3) has a PID which
identifies the type of TS packet (video, audio, other), and (4) carries descriptive
information about the program.
UHF Ultra High Frequency
Unity Gain An electronic term indicating that a signal will be neither amplified or
attenuated. One volt of signal level in results in one volt of signal level out.
Vector A measure that has two individual properties: magnitude and direction.
Vector Clip A special encoded clip version that limits only the CB and CR input video
signals and does not affect (nor is it affected by) the luminance component. This
color-only clip limits the maximum vector excursions as viewed in an encoded state
and is intended for users who wish to prevent encoded vectors from ever exceeding the
perimeter circle of an encoded vector display.
VHF Very High Frequency
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
C-9
Glossary
VITC Vertical Interval Time Code, a method for recording on to video tape the
timecode address for each video frame inserted in the vertical interval.
Waveform A visual representation of a signal in the shape of a wave that plots
amplitude versus time.
White Level The brightest part of a video signal, corresponding to approximately 1.0
Volt.
White Balance An electronic process used to calibrate the picture for accurate color
display in different lighting conditions.
Wipe A special effect in which two pictures from different video sources are displayed
on one screen. Production switchers and special effects generators provide numerous
wipe patterns varying from simple horizontal and vertical wipes to multi-shaped, multicolored arrangements.
XGA High resolution 1024x768 non-interlaced (progressive) display monitor
XVGA Extended Video Graphics Adaptor
YPBPR: CAV format composed of luminance (Y) and two color difference signals (PB
and PR)
Y/C Also S-video. Describes the separation of video signal luminance and
chrominance components.
Zero Carrier Pulse (chopper) In a TV demodulator, removes the carrier in the
vertical interval for a short period, enabling depth of field measurement.
C-10
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Index
Embedded, 3-54
Aural Alert, 4-47
A
About Screen, 4-49
Alarm
Display, 3-49
Log, 3-49, 3-51
Status, 3-51
Alarm Settings Display, 3-50, 3-80, 5-2
Alarm Status, 3-53
Alarms
Contents and Limitations, 5-2
CRC, 5-3
Duration, 5-1
Encoded Gamut, 3-40
Gamut, 5-1
GPI, 3-51, 5-2
Sample Message, 3-80, 5-2
Sample Message Description, 3-81,
5-2
Sensitivity, 5-1
Setting, 5-1
Time Code Errors, 5-16
TS Alarms, 5-11
VITS, 5-1
Anamorphic, 4-37
ASI, 3-73
Bandwidth and Trending, 3-75
Aspect Ratio, 3-43
Audio
ANALOG AUDIO IN/OUT
Connector Pinouts, B-1
Audio Level Meters, 3-55
Configuring Display Type and
Parameters, 3-55
Level, 3-56
Zoom, 3-63
Audio Options
Specifications, A-2
Audio Setup
Audio Types, 3-54
Audio Types, 3-54
AES/EBU, 3-54
Analog, 3-54
Dolby D, 3-54
Dolby E, 3-54
Dolby®, 3-54, 3-55
B
Back Panel, 1-6
Connectors, 2-3
A/B MON OUT, 2-3
Analog Audio In/Out, 2-3
C/D MON OUT, 2-3
Digital Audio IN/OUT, 2-3
Digital Audio Output, 2-3
DVI Out, 2-4
ENET, 2-4
LTC/GPI, 2-3
Option C and D, 2-3
Ref, 2-3
Remote, 2-4
Router, 2-4
SDI Input A, 2-3
SDI Input B, 2-3
USB, 2-4
Blanking
Waveform, 3-20
Breakout Board
LTC/GPI, B-3
Browser Interface
Tab Details, 6-5
Bypass, 2-8, 3-3
Exit Bypass on Alarm, 3-3, 4-48
C
Calibration Interval, 7-4
Capture
Display, 3-88
SDI, 3-89
CES, 5-1
CineSound™
Audio Setup Menu, 3-61
Channels, 3-61
Input Mapping, 3-61
Left Surround, 3-61
LFE, 3-61
Right Surround, 3-61
Clock, 3-79, 3-81, 5-2
Port Description, 2-3
Clock Recovery Circuit, 3-26
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Index-1
Index
Closed Caption, 3-45
Size, 4-37
Closed Captioning Displays
Specifications, A-8
Cold Start, 7-1
Communications Setup Menu, 4-40
Component Sequence, 3-21
Composite Gamut, 3-38
Connectors
A/B MON OUT, 2-3
Back Panel, 2-3
Analog Audio In/Out, 2-3
Digital Audio IN/OUT, 2-3
Digital Audio Output, 2-3
DVI Out, 2-4
ENET, 2-4
LTC/GPI, 2-3
Option C and D, 2-3
Ref, 2-3
Remote, 2-4
Router, 2-4
SDI Input A, 2-3
SDI Input B, 2-3
USB, 2-4
C/D MON OUT, 2-3
Console
Specifications, A-10
Control
Specifications, A-3
Controls
Types, 3-2
CRC
Alarm Error Types, 5-4
Display, 3-71
CRC Alarms, 5-3
CRC Error Display
Specifications, A-7
Cursor
Vector, 3-34
Waveform, 3-17
Cursor Mode, 3-4
Cursors
Eye Pattern, 3-24
Curved Arrow Knob, 3-3
Customer Service, 1-7
D
Data Analyzer
Index-2
Specifications, A-7
Data Display
Data Search, 3-85
Format, 3-84
Menu, 3-83
Pixel Cursor, 3-82
Pixel Group, 3-84
Trigger on Alarm, 3-83
Data Mode
Data, 3-81
DISP, 3-3
Display
Capture, 3-88
Specifications, A-4
Display Color Selection, 4-39
Display Drivers
Specifications, A-10
Display Setup Menu, 4-38
DVI-I Output
Specifications, A-2
E
Embedded Audio
Display, 3-77
Encoded Gamut
Alarm, 3-40
Environmental
Specifications, A-10
Ethernet
Addresses, 2-4
CAT5 Crossover Cable, 2-4, 2-5
Cold Started, 7-1
Conforming to Industry Standards,
4-41
Connector Pinouts, B-6
Dedicated Connection, 2-4, 2-5
Default Settings, 7-1
Network Connection, 2-5
Recording Addresses, 2-4
Setup Instructions, 2-5
Specifications, A-9
Exit, 3-3
Exit Bypass on Alarm, 3-3, 4-48
External Reference, 3-7
External Routing Control
Specifications, A-9
Eye Pattern, 3-80
Access, 3-21
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Index
Cursors, 3-24
Display, 3-21
Graticules, 3-22
Jitter High Pass Filter, 3-26
Jitter Meter, 3-23
Menu, 3-25
Observation, 3-23
Specifications, A-5
Trigger Mode, 3-26
Zoom, 3-24
Eye Pattern Setup Menu, 4-33
EyePattern
Rise Time, 3-23
F
File Navigation, 4-48
Filter
Button, 3-26
Waveform, 3-20
Flash From USB, 4-49
Format
Input and Display Relationship, 3-20
Selecting, 3-20
Front Panel, 1-6, 3-1
Controls and Indicators, 3-3
Illumination, 3-2
Full Display, 3-3
Function, 3-5
Function Not Allowed, 3-5
G
Gain
Vector, 3-33
Gamut
Alarm, 5-1
Composite, 3-38
Display, 3-37
Line Select, 3-41
RGB, 3-40
Zoom, 3-42
Gamut Display
Component, 3-40
Composite Graticule Markings, 3-39
Graticule Markings, 3-40
RGB, 3-40
Specifications, A-8
Gamut Setup Menu, 4-34
Gateway, 2-4
GPI
Alarms, 3-51, 5-2
Connector, B-3
Input Setup, 4-42
Port Description, 2-3
GPI Input Function, 4-42
GPI Rename Screen, 4-42
Graticules
Eye Pattern, 3-22
Vector, 3-28
H
H Sweep, 3-3
Horizontal Magnification
Conditions, 3-24
I
Icon Descriptions, 3-9
Inputs, 3-3
Installation
Check Contents, 2-1
IP Configuration, 4-41
J
Jitter, 3-26
Display, 3-21
High Pass Filter Selection, 3-26
Jitter Display
Specifications, A-6
K
KEYBOARD
Commands, 6-1
L
LFE, 3-66
Line Mode, 3-4
Line Select
Gamut, 3-41
Mode, 3-16, 3-34, 3-41
Waveform and Vector Display,
3-16, 3-34, 3-41
Vector, 3-34
Waveform, 3-16
Linking Panes, 3-5
Lissajous, 3-79
Lockout
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Index-3
Index
Option
Display, 3-64
Option Not Installed Message, 3-5
Overlay
Waveform, 3-20
Pane Select, 3-3
Panel Lockout, 4-44, 4-45, 4-46
Parade
Waveform, 3-20
Phase
Bar, 3-56
Vector, 3-33
Phase Mode, 3-4
Picture
Aspect Ratio, 3-43
Closed Caption, 3-45
Delay, 3-45
Display, 3-42
Gamut, 3-45
Menu, 3-44
Picture Setup Menu, 4-35
Pinouts
ANALOG AUDIO IN/OUT
Connector, B-1
Analog Audio IN/OUT Options, B-1
DVI-I In/Out Connector, B-2
Ethernet Connector, B-6
LTC/GPI Connector, B-3
Remote RJ-11 Control Connector,
B-5
Router RJ-11 Control Connector,
B-5
USB Connector, B-6
Power Requirements
Specifications, A-9
Preset Lockout, 4-45, 4-46
Presets, 3-4, 3-87
Factory Preset, 3-87
Menu, 3-87
Recalling, 3-87
Storing, 3-87
P
R
Pane
Full Screen, 3-4
Function, 3-5
Function Not Allowed, 3-5
Icons, 3-9
Input Selection, 3-5
Linking, 3-5
Navigation, 3-6
Overview, 3-8
Selection, 3-4
RA. See Return Authorization
Rack Mount, 2-2
Rackmount
Parts, 2-2
Reference, 3-47
Level, 3-79
Remote Control
Configure, 2-6, 2-7
Sample configurations, 2-7
Specifications, A-9
Panel, 4-45, 4-46
Preset, 4-45, 4-46
LTC
Port Description, 2-3
LTC/GPI, Connector, B-3
M
MAG, 3-3
Magnification
Specifications, A-8
Mechanical
Specifications, A-9
Metadata
Dolby, 3-65
Dolby®, 3-65
Video, 3-67
MLT Display, 3-3
Mouse
Commands, 6-3
Multi-Screen
Data Analyzer Display, 3-81
Selections, 3-78
Timing Custom, 3-85, 3-86
VTM Classic, 3-78
WFM/VEC Only, 3-86
N
NTSC Pedestal, 4-31
O
Index-4
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Index
Return Authorization, 1-7
RGB
Gamut Display, 3-40
Router Control, 4-43
Access, 4-43
Configuration, 4-43
Dwell Time, 4-44
Input Selection, 4-43
Port Desctiption, 2-4
Router RJ-11 Control
Connector Pinouts, B-5
S
Scroll
Metadata, 3-65, 3-78
SDI, 3-3
SDI Display Freeze
Specifications, A-6
Service, 1-7
Set Time, 4-47
Setup, 3-3
Setup Knobs, 3-3
SETUP MENU, 3-79
Shipment
Returning to Videotek, 1-7
SpyderWeb II, 6-3
Standard Accessories
Specifications, A-10
Standards
Video, 1-5
Step, 3-3
Sweep modes, 3-14
System Fault Log, 4-48
System Setup Menu, 4-44
T
Tally
Port Description, 2-3
Teletext
Display, 3-70
Terms, 3-1
Thumbnail, 4-36
Time Code
Sample Alarm Messages, 3-81, 5-2
Specifications, A-5
Timing
Display, 3-46
Pane Menu, 3-48
Reference Selection, 3-48
Timing Display, 3-47
Horizontal, 3-47
Reference, 3-47
Test, 3-47
Vertical, 3-47
Trending
Time Scale, 3-77
Trigger Mode, 3-26
Troubleshooting
VTM Series, 7-1
TS Alarms
Descriptions, 5-11
U
Unit ID, 4-44
Unit of Measure
Video Format, 3-10
USB
Connector Pinouts, B-6
V
V Sweep, 3-3
VAR, 3-3
Variable Gain
Vector, 3-33
Vector
Control, 3-33
Cursor, 3-34
Display, 3-27, 3-79
Expanding the Display, 3-42
Gain, 3-33
Line Select, 3-34
Pane Menu, 3-35
Phase, 3-33
Standard, 3-36
Variable Gain, 3-33
Zoom, 3-33
Vector Setup Menu, 4-33
Vertical Audio Meter, 3-55
Video
Specifications, A-1
Video Format
Critical Amplitude Limits, 3-10
Unit of Measure, 3-10
Video Format Menu, 4-31
Video Setup
NTSC Pedestal, 4-31
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Index-5
Index
Video standards supported, 1-5
VITS, 5-1
VTM Audio Options
Specifications, A-10
VTM Input Options
Specifications, A-11
VTM Other Options
Specifications, A-11
W
Warm Start, 7-2
Waveform, 3-9
Adjustment, 3-13
Blanking, 3-20
Center, 3-21
Component Sequence, 3-21
Cursor, 3-17
Display, 3-10, 3-80
Errors, 3-23
Filter, 3-20
Gain, 3-15
Graticules, 3-11
Line Select Mode, 3-16
Pane Menu, 3-18
Parade and Overlay, 3-20
Sweep, 3-13
Zoom, 3-16
Waveform Display, 3-11
Waveform:, 3-20
Web Remote Display, 6-4
WFM/VEC Only
Display, 3-86
X
XDS, 3-69
XVGA Output, 3-3
Z
Zoom, 3-3
Audio, 3-63
Eye Pattern, 3-24
Gamut, 3-42
Vector, 3-33, 3-42
Item Number 061778 Rev. D
Printed 10/06
Index-6
VTM Series Installation and Operation Handbook
Download PDF